home
***
CD-ROM
|
disk
|
FTP
|
other
***
search
/
OS/2 Shareware BBS: 14 Text
/
14-Text.zip
/
wpsprogr.zip
/
WPS3.INF
(
.txt
)
< prev
next >
Wrap
OS/2 Help File
|
1999-05-12
|
312KB
|
10,981 lines
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Presentation Manager Functions Related to the Workplace Shell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This section contains an alphabetical list of the Presentation Manager (PM)
functions which are available to the application for using and controlling
Workplace Shell objects.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. WinCopyObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function copies an object from its existing location to a specified new
destination.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObjectofObject; /* Handle of the Workplace Shell object being copied. */
HOBJECT hObjectofDest; /* Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be copied. */
ULONG ulReserved; /* Reserved value; must be 0. */
HOBJECT rc; /* Handle of the newly created object. */
rc = WinCopyObject(hObjectofObject, hObjectofDest,
ulReserved);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject Parameter - hObjectofObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the Workplace Shell object being copied.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject Parameter - hObjectofDest ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be
copied.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject Parameter - ulReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the newly created object.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the Workplace Shell object being copied.
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be
copied.
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the newly created object.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Using HOBJECTs for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported. Its REXX counterpart is
SysCopyObject.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Possible returns from WinGetLastError
WPERR_INVALID_FLAGS (0x1719)
An invalid flag was specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinMoveObject
WinQueryObjectWindow
WinSaveObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example copies the drives object into the startup folder; the drives
folder will be opened at the startup of the system.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include "os2.h"
HOBJECT hObjectofDest;
HOBJECT hObjectofObject;
HOBJECT hObjectofResult;
hObjectofObject = WinQueryObject("<WP_DRIVES>");
if (hObjectofObject != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject of Drives was successful */
hObjectofDest = WinQueryObject("<WP_START>");
if (hObjectofDest != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject of Startup was successful */
hObjectofResult = WinCopyObject(hObjectofObject, hObjectofDest, 0);
if (hObjectofResult != NULL)
{
/* Drives Object was successfully copied to the Startup Folder */
}
else
{
/* Copy failed */
}
}
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCopyObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Errors
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. WinCreateObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function creates an instance of object class pszClassName, with title
pszTitle, and places the icon and title in the location referred to by
pszLocation.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pszClassName; /* Pointer to class name. */
PSZ pszTitle; /* Pointer to initial title of object. */
PSZ pszSetupString; /* Pointer to setup string. */
PSZ pszLocation; /* Folder location. */
ULONG ulFlags; /* Creation flags. */
HOBJECT rc; /* Handle to the created object. */
rc = WinCreateObject(pszClassName, pszTitle,
pszSetupString, pszLocation, ulFlags);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Parameter - pszClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the class
of which this object is a member.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Parameter - pszTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszTitle (PSZ) - input
Pointer to initial title of object.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the initial title of
the object as it is to appear when displayed on the user interface
underneath an icon or on the title bar of an open object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Parameter - pszSetupString ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszSetupString (PSZ) - input
Pointer to setup string.
See WPLaunchPad for a table of setup strings used to customize the Toolbar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Parameter - pszLocation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszLocation (PSZ) - input
Folder location.
This value can be in any of the following formats:
Predefined object ids of system folders.
"<WP_NOWHERE>" The hidden folder.
"<LOCATION_DESKTOP>" The currently active desktop.
"<WP_OS2SYS>" The System folder.
"<WP_TEMPS>" The Templates folder.
"<WP_CONFIG>" The System Setup folder.
"<WP_START>" The Startup folder.
"<WP_INFO>" The Information folder.
"<WP_DRIVES>" The Drives folder.
Real name specified as a fully qualified path name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Parameter - ulFlags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulFlags (ULONG) - input
Creation flags.
This parameter can have one of the following values:
CO_FAILIFEXISTS
No object will be created if an object with the given object ID
already exists. This is the default.
CO_REPLACEIFEXISTS
If an object with the given ID already exists, the existing object
should be replaced.
CO_UPDATEIFEXISTS
If an object with the given ID already exists, the existing object
should be updated with the new information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle to the created object.
NULLHANDLE
Error occurred.
Other
A handle to the object created. This handle is persistent and can
be used for the WinSetObjectData and WinDestroyObject function
calls.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the class
of which this object is a member.
pszTitle (PSZ) - input
Pointer to initial title of object.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the initial title of
the object as it is to appear when displayed on the user interface
underneath an icon or on the title bar of an open object.
pszSetupString (PSZ) - input
Pointer to setup string.
See WPLaunchPad for a table of setup strings used to customize the Toolbar.
pszLocation (PSZ) - input
Folder location.
This value can be in any of the following formats:
Predefined object ids of system folders.
"<WP_NOWHERE>" The hidden folder.
"<LOCATION_DESKTOP>" The currently active desktop.
"<WP_OS2SYS>" The System folder.
"<WP_TEMPS>" The Templates folder.
"<WP_CONFIG>" The System Setup folder.
"<WP_START>" The Startup folder.
"<WP_INFO>" The Information folder.
"<WP_DRIVES>" The Drives folder.
Real name specified as a fully qualified path name.
ulFlags (ULONG) - input
Creation flags.
This parameter can have one of the following values:
CO_FAILIFEXISTS
No object will be created if an object with the given object ID
already exists. This is the default.
CO_REPLACEIFEXISTS
If an object with the given ID already exists, the existing object
should be replaced.
CO_UPDATEIFEXISTS
If an object with the given ID already exists, the existing object
should be updated with the new information.
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle to the created object.
NULLHANDLE
Error occurred.
Other
A handle to the object created. This handle is persistent and can
be used for the WinSetObjectData and WinDestroyObject function
calls.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The pszSetupString contains a series of "keyname=value" pairs, that change the
behavior of the object. "keynames" are separated by semicolons, and "values"
are separated by commas.
"key=value;key2=value1,value2;"
If you want a literal comma or a literal semicolon inside one of your fields
you must type the following:
^, A literal comma.
^; A literal semicolon.
Each object class documents the keynames and the parameters it expects to see
immediately following. See the following keyname-value pairs tables:
WPColorPalette
WPDisk
WPFolder
WPFontPalette
WPKeyboard
WPLaunchPad
WPPalette
WPPrinter
WPRPrinter
WPProgram
WPProgramFile
WPSchemePalette
WPShadow
WPObject
Note that ALL parameters have safe defaults, so it is never necessary to pass
unnecessary parameters to an object.
For more information about object classes, see the Workplace Shell Programming
Guide.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinDeregisterObjectClass
WinDestroyObject
WinRegisterObjectClass
WinReplaceObjectClass
WinSetObjectData
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.3. WinCreateShadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function creates a shadow of an object and places it in a specified
location.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObjectofObject; /* Handle of the object from which the shadow is to be created. */
HOBJECT hObjectofDest; /* Handle of the folder into which hObjectofObject is to be placed. */
ULONG ulReserved; /* Reserved value; must be 0. */
HOBJECT rc; /* Handle of the newly created shadow object. */
rc = WinCreateShadow(hObjectofObject, hObjectofDest,
ulReserved);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow Parameter - hObjectofObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the object from which the shadow is to be created.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow Parameter - hObjectofDest ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the folder into which hObjectofObject is to be placed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow Parameter - ulReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the newly created shadow object.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the object from which the shadow is to be created.
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the folder into which hObjectofObject is to be placed.
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the newly created shadow object.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported. Its REXX counterpart is
SysCreateShadowObject.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinMoveObject
WinQueryObjectWindow
WinSaveObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinCreateShadow - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.4. WinDeregisterObjectClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function deregisters (removes) a workplace object class.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pszClassName; /* Pointer to class name. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinDeregisterObjectClass(pszClassName);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass Parameter - pszClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being removed from the workplace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being removed from the workplace.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Workplace object classes are not deleted unless the application issues a
WinDeregisterObjectClass. Object classes will be automatically registered when
a dynamic-link library containing an object definition is added to the system.
The only advantage of deregistering an object class is to optimize the system
performance. All registered classes are maintained in the OS2.INI and are
cached upon system initialization. If the class is no longer needed, it should
be removed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinRegisterObjectClass
WinReplaceObjectClass
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDeregisterObjectClass - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.5. WinDestroyObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is called to delete a workplace object.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT object; /* Handle to a workplace object. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinDestroyObject(object);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject Parameter - object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
object (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a workplace object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
object (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a workplace object.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinDestroyObject function will permanently remove an object that was
created with the WinCreateObject function.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinSetObjectData
WinDestroyObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinDestroyObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.6. WinEnumObjectClasses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinEnumObjectClasses function will return a list of all workplace object
classes that have been registered.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
POBJCLASS pObjClass; /* Pointer to object class. */
PULONG pSize; /* Length of the pObjClass buffer in bytes. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinEnumObjectClasses(pObjClass, pSize);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses Parameter - pObjClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pObjClass (POBJCLASS) - input
Pointer to object class.
A pointer to a buffer to be filled with information about the registered
workplace object classes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses Parameter - pSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pSize (PULONG) - in/out
Length of the pObjClass buffer in bytes.
If pObjClass is NULL, the actual size of pObjClass is returned in pSize
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pObjClass (POBJCLASS) - input
Pointer to object class.
A pointer to a buffer to be filled with information about the registered
workplace object classes.
pSize (PULONG) - in/out
Length of the pObjClass buffer in bytes.
If pObjClass is NULL, the actual size of pObjClass is returned in pSize
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
WinEnumObjectClasses will return a buffer containing all workplace object
classes that are currently registered with the system. Workplace object classes
are registered with the system through the function call
WinRegisterObjectClass.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinRegisterObjectClass
WinReplaceObjectClass
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinEnumObjectClasses - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.7. WinFreeFileIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function frees an icon pointer that was originally allocated by
WinLoadFileIcon.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HPOINTER hptr; /* A pointer to an icon loaded by WinLoadFileIcon. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinFreeFileIcon(hptr);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon Parameter - hptr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptr (HPOINTER) - input
A pointer to an icon loaded by WinLoadFileIcon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptr (HPOINTER) - input
A pointer to an icon loaded by WinLoadFileIcon.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinSetFileIcon
WinLoadFileIcon
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinFreeFileIcon - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.8. WinIsSOMDDReady ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function returns the state of the DSOM daemon (SOMDD), started by the
Workplace Shell process using WinRestartSOMDD.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
BOOL fReady; /* SOMDD-state indicator. */
fReady = WinIsSOMDDReady();
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady Return Value - fReady ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fReady (BOOL) - returns
SOMDD-state indicator.
TRUE
SOMDD has been started by the Workplace Shell process.
FALSE
SOMDD has not been started by the Workplace Shell process.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fReady (BOOL) - returns
SOMDD-state indicator.
TRUE
SOMDD has been started by the Workplace Shell process.
FALSE
SOMDD has not been started by the Workplace Shell process.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function returns the state of the DSOM daemon started only by the
Workplace Shell process using a call to WinRestartSOMDD. This does not include
the status of the DSOM daemon if started by any other process.
Note: This function requires that the Presentation Manager Shell is up and
running.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinIsWPDServerReady
WinRestartSOMDD
WinRestartWPDServer
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example starts the DSOM daemon and, a short time later, checks to see if
it indeed has started successfully.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
enum {OFF, ON};
WinRestartSOMDD(ON);
.
.
.
if ( WinIsSOMDDReady() )
somPrintf ("SOMDD is running\n")
else
somPrintf ("SOMDD failed to start, possiblly started already"
"by another process\n");
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsSOMDDReady - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.9. WinIsWPDServerReady ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function returns the state of the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
BOOL fReady; /* DSOM server-state indicator. DSOM Server status. */
fReady = WinIsWPDServerReady();
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady Return Value - fReady ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fReady (BOOL) - returns
DSOM server-state indicator. DSOM Server status.
TRUE
Workplace Shell DSOM Server is ready.
FALSE
Workplace Shell DSOM Server is not ready.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fReady (BOOL) - returns
DSOM server-state indicator. DSOM Server status.
TRUE
Workplace Shell DSOM Server is ready.
FALSE
Workplace Shell DSOM Server is not ready.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function returns the ready status of the Workplace Shell DSOM Server.
Note: This function requires that the PM Shell is up and running.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinIsSOMDDReady
WinRestartSOMDD
WinRestartWPDServer
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example stops the Workplace Shell DSOM Server, then waits until the server
has terminate before stopping the DSOM daemon.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
ULONG count=0;
enum {OFF, ON};
WinRestartWPDServer(OFF);
/* Make sure the server thread has terminated completely before */
/* bring down the DSOM daemon */
while ( WinIsWPDServerReady() )
{
HEV hev;
/* First create a private, reset, event semaphore. */
DosCreateEventSem( (PSZ)NULL, &hev, 0, FALSE);
/* Wait for 1 second; then try again for a max. of 30 sec. */
DosWaitEventSem (hev, 1000);
if (count++ > 30)
break;
}
WinRestartSOMDD (OFF);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinIsWPDServerReady - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.10. WinLoadFileIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function returns a pointer to an icon which is associated with the file
specified by pszFileName.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pszFileName; /* Pointer to file name. */
BOOL fPrivate; /* Icon usage flag. */
HPOINTER hIcon; /* Icon handle. */
hIcon = WinLoadFileIcon(pszFileName, fPrivate);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon Parameter - pszFileName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszFileName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to file name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the file
whose icon will be loaded.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon Parameter - fPrivate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fPrivate (BOOL) - input
Icon usage flag.
TRUE
A private copy of this icon is requested. This flag should be used
if the application needs to modify the icon.
FALSE
A shared pointer to this icon is requested. This flag should be
used if application needs to display the icon without modifying it.
This should be used whenever possible to optimize system resource
use.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon Return Value - hIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hIcon (HPOINTER) - returns
Icon handle.
NULL
Error occurred.
OTHER
Handle to an icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszFileName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to file name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the file
whose icon will be loaded.
fPrivate (BOOL) - input
Icon usage flag.
TRUE
A private copy of this icon is requested. This flag should be used
if the application needs to modify the icon.
FALSE
A shared pointer to this icon is requested. This flag should be
used if application needs to display the icon without modifying it.
This should be used whenever possible to optimize system resource
use.
hIcon (HPOINTER) - returns
Icon handle.
NULL
Error occurred.
OTHER
Handle to an icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The icon will be retrieved in the following order until an icon has been found:
.ICON extended attribute
.ICO file in same directory with same prefix
Application specific icon (if PM executable or MS Windows* executable)
PM application icon (if PM executable)
MS Windows* application icon (if MS Windows* application executable)
OS/2 application icon (if OS/2 full-screen only executable )
OS/2 window icon (if OS/2 window compatible executable)
DOS windowed application icon (if DOS windowed executable)
Program application (if unknown type executable)
Data icon specified by associated application
Data icon of associated application
Data file icon (if not program or directory)
Directory icon (if directory)
The HPOINTER returned in fPrivate should be freed by the caller via
WinFreeFileIcon when it is no longer being used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinSetFileIcon
WinFreeFileIcon
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinLoadFileIcon - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.11. WinMoveObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function moves an object from its existing location to a specified new
destination.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObjectofObject; /* Handle of the Workplace Shell object being moved. */
HOBJECT hObjectofDest; /* Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be moved. */
ULONG ulReserved; /* Reserved value; must be 0. */
HOBJECT rc; /* Handle of the source object being moved. */
rc = WinMoveObject(hObjectofObject, hObjectofDest,
ulReserved);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject Parameter - hObjectofObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the Workplace Shell object being moved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject Parameter - hObjectofDest ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be moved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject Parameter - ulReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the source object being moved.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the Workplace Shell object being moved.
hObjectofDest (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the destination folder into which hObjectofObject is to be moved.
ulReserved (ULONG) - input
Reserved value; must be 0.
rc (HOBJECT) - returns
Handle of the source object being moved.
A return value of NULLHANDLE indicates that either hObjectofDest is
NULLHANDLE or an object with the same name as hObjectofObject exists in the
destination folder.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported. Its REXX counterpart is
SysMoveObject.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Possible returns from WinGetLastError
WPERR_INVALID_FLAGS (0x1719)
An invalid flag was specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCopyObject
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinQueryObjectWindow
WinSaveObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example moves the drives object onto the Desktop.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include "os2.h"
HOBJECT hObjectofDest;
HOBJECT hObjectofObject;
HOBJECT hObjectofResult;
hObjectofObject = WinQueryObject("<WP_DRIVES>");
if (hObjectofObject != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject of Drives was successful */
hObjectofDest = WinQueryObject("<WP_DESKTOP>");
if (hObjectofDest != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject of Startup was successful */
hObjectofResult = WinMoveObject(hObjectofObject, hObjectofDest, 0);
if (hObjectofResult != NULL)
{
/* Drives Object was successfully copied to the Desktop */
}
else
{
/* Move failed */
}
}
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinMoveObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Errors
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.12. WinNotebookButtonFromID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to Version 4, or higher, of the OS/2 operating
system.
This function exports a convience function to find BS_NOTEBOOKBUTTON buttons.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HWND hwndDlg; /* Handle of the dialog window of the properties page. */
ULONG id; /* ID of the button on the properties page. page. */
HWND rc; /* Return Code */
rc = WinNotebookButtonFromID(hwndDlg, id);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID Parameter - hwndDlg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndDlg (HWND) - input
Handle of the dialog window of the properties page.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID Parameter - id ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
id (ULONG) - input
ID of the button on the properties page. page.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (HWND) - returns
Return Code
TRUE Successful completion.
FALSE Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndDlg (HWND) - input
Handle of the dialog window of the properties page.
id (ULONG) - input
ID of the button on the properties page. page.
rc (HWND) - returns
Return Code
TRUE Successful completion.
FALSE Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID - Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Given the HWND of the dialog of the properties page, the ID of the button, and
the button of the properties page (for example, Undo, Default, or Help),
WinNotebookButtonFromID, returns the HWND for that button. This is used with
the buttons of the BS_NOTEBOOKBUTTON style. Ownership of buttons of this style
is changed from the dialog to the notebook after the dialog is loaded.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinWaitForShell
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinNotebookButtonFromID - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Usage
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.13. WinOpenObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function eithers opens a view of the given object or surfaces an existing
view.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObjectofObject; /* Handle to a Workplace Shell object to be opened. */
ULONG ulView; /* View in which to open the specified object. */
BOOL fFlags; /* Flags. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinOpenObject(hObjectofObject, ulView,
fFlags);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject Parameter - hObjectofObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a Workplace Shell object to be opened.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject Parameter - ulView ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulView (ULONG) - input
View in which to open the specified object.
OPEN_SETTINGS
OPEN_TREE
OPEN_DEFAULT
OPEN_CONTENTS
OPEN_DETAILS
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject Parameter - fFlags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fFlags (BOOL) - input
Flags.
TRUE
Open a view of the object which already exists and supports
concurrent views, by calling wpViewObject.
FALSE
Open a view of this object by calling wpOpen.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObjectofObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a Workplace Shell object to be opened.
ulView (ULONG) - input
View in which to open the specified object.
OPEN_SETTINGS
OPEN_TREE
OPEN_DEFAULT
OPEN_CONTENTS
OPEN_DETAILS
fFlags (BOOL) - input
Flags.
TRUE
Open a view of the object which already exists and supports
concurrent views, by calling wpViewObject.
FALSE
Open a view of this object by calling wpOpen.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported. Its REXX counterpart is
SysOpenObject. If concurrent views is off, wpViewObject will resurface an
existing object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinSaveObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include "os2.h"
HOBJECT hObject;
ULONG ulView;
BOOL fFlags
BOOL fSuccess;
hObject = WinQueryObject("<WP_DESKTOP>");
if (hObject != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject was successful */
fSuccess = WinOpenObject(hObject, OPEN_SETTINGS,TRUE);
if (fSuccess)
{
/* If concurrent views is off and a settings view of the desktop already
* exits, then it was successfully resurfaced.
*
* If concurrent views is on then another settings view of the desktop
* was successfully opened
*/
}
else
{
/* WinOpenObject failed */
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinOpenObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.14. WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function returns the directory specification of the active desktop.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pszPathName; /* Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written. */
ULONG ulSize; /* Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathName. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname(pszPathName,
ulSize);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname Parameter - pszPathName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPathName (PSZ) - output
Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname Parameter - ulSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulSize (ULONG) - input
Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathName.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPathName (PSZ) - output
Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written.
ulSize (ULONG) - input
Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathName.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is used to find the directory specification of the current
desktop. The current desktop is not always \DESKTOP of the boot drive.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Possible returns from WinGetLastError
PMERR_INVALID_PARAMETER (0x1645)
An application parameter value is invalid for its converted PM type. For
example: a 4-byte value outside the range -32,768 to +32,767 cannot be
converted to a SHORT, and a negative number cannot be converted to a ULONG
or USHORT.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example finds the directory specification of the current desktop.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
CHAR szPath[CCHMAXPATH + 1];
BOOL fSuccess;
fSuccess = WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname(szPath,sizeof(szPath));
if (fSuccess)
{
/* WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname was successful */
}
else
{
/* WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname failed */
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryActiveDesktopPathname - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Errors
Remarks
Example Code
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.15. WinQueryObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinQueryObject function returns a handle to the given object.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pObjectID; /* The object ID of an existing object. */
HOBJECT hObject; /* MRESULT. */
hObject = WinQueryObject(pObjectID);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject Parameter - pObjectID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pObjectID (PSZ) - input
The object ID of an existing object.
The object ID of an existing object, for example <LOCATION_DESKTOP>, or
alternatively the fully qualified filename of any file or directory.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject Return Value - hObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObject (HOBJECT) - returns
MRESULT.
Persistent object handle, or NULLHANDLE if the object does not exist or
could not be awakened.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pObjectID (PSZ) - input
The object ID of an existing object.
The object ID of an existing object, for example <LOCATION_DESKTOP>, or
alternatively the fully qualified filename of any file or directory.
hObject (HOBJECT) - returns
MRESULT.
Persistent object handle, or NULLHANDLE if the object does not exist or
could not be awakened.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function allows you to obtain the persistant object handle for any file
object, by passing the fully qualified filename. Similarly any objects' handle
can be retrieved if its object ID string is passed. Once a program has an
object handle, it is able to change the objects state by using the
WinSetObjectData function or delete the object using the WinDestroyObject
function. Note that valid object ID strings must always start with the "<"
character and be terminated by the ">" character, and are thus invalid file
system names.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinSetObjectData
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.16. WinQueryObjectPath ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function returns the directory specification of a given object handle.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObject; /* Object handle of the object whose file/directory specification is to be returned. */
PSZ pszPathname; /* Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written. */
ULONG ulSize; /* Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathname. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinQueryObjectPath(hObject, pszPathname,
ulSize);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath Parameter - hObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObject (HOBJECT) - input
Object handle of the object whose file/directory specification is to be
returned.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath Parameter - pszPathname ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPathname (PSZ) - output
Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath Parameter - ulSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulSize (ULONG) - input
Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathname.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObject (HOBJECT) - input
Object handle of the object whose file/directory specification is to be
returned.
pszPathname (PSZ) - output
Memory allocated by caller in which directory specification is written.
ulSize (ULONG) - input
Number of bytes pointed to by pszPathname.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is used to find the file/directory specification of a given
object handle.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Possible returns from WinGetLastError
PMERR_INVALID_PARAMETERS (0x1208)
An application parameter value is invalid for its converted PM type. For
example: a 4-byte value outside the range -32 768 to +32 767 cannot be
converted to a SHORT, and a negative number cannot be converted to a ULONG
or USHORT.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example finds the file/directory of the <WP_OS2SYS> object..
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObject;
CHAR szPath[CCHMAXPATH + 1];
BOOL fSuccess;
hObject = WinQueryObject("<WP_OS2SYS>");
if (hObject != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject was successful */
fSuccess = WinQueryObjectPath(hObject,szPath,sizeof(szPath));
if (fSuccess)
{
/* WinQueryObjectPath was successful */
}
else
{
/* WinQueryObjectPath failed */
}
}
else
{
/* WinQueryObject failed */
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinQueryObjectPath - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Errors
Remarks
Example Code
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.17. WinRegisterObjectClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinRegisterObjectClass function registers a workplace object class.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pClassName; /* A pointer to object class being registered. */
PSZ pModname; /* A pointer to DLL name. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinRegisterObjectClass(pClassName, pModname);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass Parameter - pClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pClassName (PSZ) - input
A pointer to object class being registered.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being registered in the workplace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass Parameter - pModname ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pModname (PSZ) - input
A pointer to DLL name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the DLL
which holds the object definition.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pClassName (PSZ) - input
A pointer to object class being registered.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being registered in the workplace.
pModname (PSZ) - input
A pointer to DLL name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the DLL
which holds the object definition.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The DLL must be one created using the IBM System Object Model. Object classes
will automatically be added to the system when installing a DLL which contains
an object definition. Generally, it is not required for the object DLL to be
present at the time WinRegisterObjectClass is called. However, if the object
class overrides wpclsQueryInstanceType or wpclsQueryInstanceFilter, the DLL
must be present at the time of the class registration.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDeregisterObjectClass
WinReplaceObjectClass
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRegisterObjectClass - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.18. WinReplaceObjectClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinReplaceObjectClass function replaces a registered class with another
registered class. If fReplace is FALSE, pOldClassName will revert back to its
original definition.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pOldClassName; /* Pointer to class name. */
PSZ pNewClassName; /* Pointer to new class name. */
BOOL fReplace; /* Function replacement flag. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinReplaceObjectClass(pOldClassName,
pNewClassName, fReplace);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass Parameter - pOldClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pOldClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being replaced by pNewClassName in the workplace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass Parameter - pNewClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNewClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to new class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class replacing the pOldClassName class.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass Parameter - fReplace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fReplace (BOOL) - input
Function replacement flag.
TRUE
Replace the function of class pOldClassName with the function of
the class pNewClassName.
FALSE
Undo the replacement of the pOldClassName with pNewClassName by
restoring the pOldClassName back to its original functionality.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pOldClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class being replaced by pNewClassName in the workplace.
pNewClassName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to new class name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the object
class replacing the pOldClassName class.
fReplace (BOOL) - input
Function replacement flag.
TRUE
Replace the function of class pOldClassName with the function of
the class pNewClassName.
FALSE
Undo the replacement of the pOldClassName with pNewClassName by
restoring the pOldClassName back to its original functionality.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The class specified by pNewClassName must be a descendant of the class
specified by pOldClassName, otherwise an error will be returned. Replacing an
object is useful if it is desired to modify the behavior of objects which are
instances of the class pOldClassName and which are not aware of the class
pNewClassName.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinDeregisterObjectClass
WinRegisterObjectClass
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinReplaceObjectClass - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.19. WinRestartSOMDD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function starts the DSOM daemon.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
BOOL fAction; /* Flag indicating action to perform on the DSOM daemon. */
APIRET rc; /* Return code. */
rc = WinRestartSOMDD(fAction);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD Parameter - fAction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAction (BOOL) - input
Flag indicating action to perform on the DSOM daemon.
TRUE
Start the DSOM daemon.
FALSE
Stop the DSOM daemon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (APIRET) - returns
Return code.
PMERR_OK (0x0000)
Successfully invoked.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_IS_ACTIVE (0x1056)
The Workplace Shell DSOM Server is active and running. It cannot
stop the DSOM daemon until the Workplace Shell DSOM Server has
stopped.
PMERR_SOMDD_IS_ACTIVE (0x1058)
The DSOM daemon has been started by the Workplace Shell process and
is active and running; therefore, it cannot be started again.
PMERR_SOMDD_NOT_STARTED (0x1059)
The DSOM daemon failed to start. It might be active in another
process.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAction (BOOL) - input
Flag indicating action to perform on the DSOM daemon.
TRUE
Start the DSOM daemon.
FALSE
Stop the DSOM daemon.
rc (APIRET) - returns
Return code.
PMERR_OK (0x0000)
Successfully invoked.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_IS_ACTIVE (0x1056)
The Workplace Shell DSOM Server is active and running. It cannot
stop the DSOM daemon until the Workplace Shell DSOM Server has
stopped.
PMERR_SOMDD_IS_ACTIVE (0x1058)
The DSOM daemon has been started by the Workplace Shell process and
is active and running; therefore, it cannot be started again.
PMERR_SOMDD_NOT_STARTED (0x1059)
The DSOM daemon failed to start. It might be active in another
process.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function starts the DSOM daemon in the Workplace Shell process as a
background process invisible to the users. The status of the daemon can be
determined at any time by calling WinIsSOMDDReady.
Note: This function requires that the PM Shell is up and running.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinIsSOMDDReady
WinIsWPDServerReady
WinRestartWPDServer
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example starts the DSOM daemon within the Workplace Shell process.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
enum {OFF, ON};
APIRET apiRtnCd;
apiRtnCd = WinRestartSOMDD(ON);
if (apiRtnCd == PMERR_SOMDD_NOT_STARTED)
somPrintf ("DSOM Daemon failed to start; might be active already");
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartSOMDD - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.20. WinRestartWPDServer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function starts the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
BOOL fAction; /* Flag indicating the action to perform on the Workplace Shell DSOM server. */
APIRET rc; /* Return code. */
rc = WinRestartWPDServer(fAction);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer Parameter - fAction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAction (BOOL) - input
Flag indicating the action to perform on the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
TRUE
Start the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
FALSE
Stop the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (APIRET) - returns
Return code.
PMERR_OK (0x0000)
Successfully invoked.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_IS_ACTIVE (0x1056)
The Workplace Shell DSOM server is active and cannot be started
again.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_NOT_STARTED (0x1057)
The Workplace Shell DSOM server could not be started, possibly
related to a corrupted copy of WPDSRVP.DLL.
Other
Any other non-zero value could indicate that the WPDSRVP.DLL is
corrupted or not found.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAction (BOOL) - input
Flag indicating the action to perform on the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
TRUE
Start the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
FALSE
Stop the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
rc (APIRET) - returns
Return code.
PMERR_OK (0x0000)
Successfully invoked.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_IS_ACTIVE (0x1056)
The Workplace Shell DSOM server is active and cannot be started
again.
PMERR_WPDSERVER_NOT_STARTED (0x1057)
The Workplace Shell DSOM server could not be started, possibly
related to a corrupted copy of WPDSRVP.DLL.
Other
Any other non-zero value could indicate that the WPDSRVP.DLL is
corrupted or not found.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function requires that the DSOM daemon is started first and must be
running successfully in order for the Workplace Shell DSOM server to become
ready. The status of the Workplace Shell DSOM server can be obtained at any
time using WinIsWPDServerReady. Once the DSOM server is ready, a client
Workplace Shell DSOM server application can be executed.
Note: This function requires that the PM Shell is up and running.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinIsSOMDDReady
WinIsWPDServerReady
WinRestartSOMDD
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example starts the DSOM daemon within the Workplace Shell process and then
starts the Workplace Shell DSOM server.
#define INCL_WINERRORS
#define INCL_WPCLASS
#include <os2.h>
enum {OFF, ON};
APIRET apiRtnCd;
apiRtnCd=WinRestartSOMDD(ON);
if (apiRtnCd == PMERR_OK)
{
apiRtnCd = WinRestartWPDServer(ON);
if (apiRtnCd)
{
PERRINFO perriErrorInfo;
if (apiRtnCd == PMERR_WPDSERVER_IS_ACTIVE)
{
somPrintf("The Workplace Shell DSOM server is already running");
exit(2);
}
if (apiRtnCd == PMERR_WPDSERVER_NOT_STARTED)
{
somPrintf("Failed to start the Workplace Shell DSOM server");
exit(2);
}
/* Obtain the error block */
/* WinGetErrorInfo is for DosLoadModule related errors only */
perriErrorInfo = WinGetErrorInfo(hab);
somPrintf("Loading WPDSRVP.DLL failed: %ld", perriErrorInfo->idError);
WinFreeErrorInfo(perriErrorInfo);
exit(99);
}
somPrintf("All's well!");
}
else
{
somPrintf("Failed to start the DSOM daemon");
exit(1);
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestartWPDServer - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.21. WinRestoreWindowPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinRestoreWindowPos function will restore the size and position of the
window specified by hwnd to the state it was in when WinStoreWindowPos was last
called with the same pAppName and pKeyName.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pAppName; /* Pointer to application name. */
PSZ pKeyName; /* Pointer to key name. */
HWND hwnd; /* Window handle of the window to restore. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinRestoreWindowPos(pAppName, pKeyName,
hwnd);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos Parameter - pAppName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pAppName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to application name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the application name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos Parameter - pKeyName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pKeyName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to key name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the key name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos Parameter - hwnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwnd (HWND) - input
Window handle of the window to restore.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pAppName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to application name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the application name.
pKeyName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to key name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the key name.
hwnd (HWND) - input
Window handle of the window to restore.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function will also restore presentation parameters which were saved by a
previous call to WinStoreWindowPos.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinStoreWindowPos
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinRestoreWindowPos - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.22. WinSaveObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to OS/2 Version 3.0 or higher.
This function saves the state of an object.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT hObject; /* Handle of the object to be saved. */
BOOL fAsync; /* Asynchronous flag. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinSaveObject(hObject, fAsync);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject Parameter - hObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the object to be saved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject Parameter - fAsync ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAsync (BOOL) - input
Asynchronous flag.
TRUE
Calls asynchronous save.
FALSE
Calls synchronous save.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hObject (HOBJECT) - input
Handle of the object to be saved.
fAsync (BOOL) - input
Asynchronous flag.
TRUE
Calls asynchronous save.
FALSE
Calls synchronous save.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If an asynchronous save is called, the object will be saved on a separate
thread ("lazy written"); this is the preferred method for saving. Otherwise,
the object is saved on the user interface thread.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCopyObject
WinCreateObject
WinDestroyObject
WinMoveObject
WinQueryObjectWindow
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include "os2.h"
HOBJECT Object;
BOOL fAsync = TRUE;
BOOL fSuccess
hObject = WinQueryObject("<WP_DESKTOP>");
if (hObject != NULL)
{
/* WinQueryObject was successful */
fSuccess = WinSaveObject(hObject,fAsync);
if (fSuccess)
{
/* The state of the Desktop was saved Asynchronously */
}
else
{
/* Asynchronous save of the Desktop failed */
}
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSaveObject - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.23. WinSetFileIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
WinSetFileIcon sets the icon for the file specified by pFileName to the icon
specified by picon.
#define INCL_WINPOINTERS
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pFileName; /* Pointer to file name. */
PICONINFO picon; /* A pointer to an ICONINFO structure containing an icon specification. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinSetFileIcon(pFileName, picon);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon Parameter - pFileName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pFileName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to file name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the file
whose icon will be set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon Parameter - picon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
picon (PICONINFO) - input
A pointer to an ICONINFO structure containing an icon specification.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pFileName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to file name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the name of the file
whose icon will be set.
picon (PICONINFO) - input
A pointer to an ICONINFO structure containing an icon specification.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The specified icon is written to the file's .ICON extended attribute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinLoadFileIcon
WinFreeFileIcon
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetFileIcon - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.24. WinSetObjectData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinSetObjectData function is called to set data on a workplace object.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HOBJECT object; /* Handle to a workplace object. */
PSZ pSetupString; /* Pointer to object-specific parameters. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinSetObjectData(object, pSetupString);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData Parameter - object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
object (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a workplace object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData Parameter - pSetupString ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pSetupString (PSZ) - input
Pointer to object-specific parameters.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the object-specific
parameters to the new object.
The pSetupString string is extracted when the wpSetup method is called. For
a listing of setup strings, see individual object classes; See WPLaunchPad
class definition for a discussion of setup string values used in Toolbar
customization.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
object (HOBJECT) - input
Handle to a workplace object.
pSetupString (PSZ) - input
Pointer to object-specific parameters.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the object-specific
parameters to the new object.
The pSetupString string is extracted when the wpSetup method is called. For
a listing of setup strings, see individual object classes; See WPLaunchPad
class definition for a discussion of setup string values used in Toolbar
customization.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion.
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinSetObjectData function will change settings on an object that was
created with the WinCreateObject function.
Using HOBJECT for .INI files or files in which an application uses a
rename/save/delete sequence is not supported.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCreateObject
WinSetObjectData
WinDestroyObject
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinSetObjectData - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.25. WinShutdownSystem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinShutdownSystem function will close down the system.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
HAB hab; /* Anchor-block handle. */
HMQ hmq; /* Message-queue handle. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinShutdownSystem(hab, hmq);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem Parameter - hab ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hab (HAB) - input
Anchor-block handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem Parameter - hmq ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hmq (HMQ) - input
Message-queue handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hab (HAB) - input
Anchor-block handle.
hmq (HMQ) - input
Message-queue handle.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinShutdownSystem function will close all running applications and will
then call DosShutdown.
Presentation Manager applications will receive a WM_SAVEAPPLICATION message
prior to a WM_QUIT message.
When the system is restarted, all applications that were running when
WinShutdownSystem was last called will be restarted.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinCancelShutdown
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Example Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This example performs an OS/2 System Shutdown from a program.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#define INCL_DOSFILEMGR
#define INCL_DOSERRORS
#include <os2.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int main(VOID)
{
HAB hab = NULLHANDLE; /* Window handle */
HMQ hmq = NULLHANDLE; /* Message queue handle */
BOOL fSuccess = 0; /* Win API success indicator */
hab = WinInitialize( 0 );
hmq = WinCreateMsgQueue( hab, 0 );
/* Prevent our program from hanging the shutdown. If this call is
omitted, the system will wait for us to do a WinDestroyMsgQueue. */
fSuccess = WinCancelShutdown( hmq, TRUE );
/* Shutdown the system! */
printf("System Shutdown will now be attempted...\n");
fSuccess = WinShutdownSystem( hab, hmq );
if (!fSuccess) {
return 1;
} else {
return NO_ERROR;
} /* endif */
}
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinShutdownSystem - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Example Code
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.26. WinStoreWindowPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The WinStoreWindowPos function will save the current size and position of the
window specified by hwnd.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
PSZ pAppName; /* Pointer to application name. */
PSZ pKeyName; /* Pointer to key name. */
HWND hwnd; /* Window handle for the window to be stored. */
BOOL rc; /* Success indicator. */
rc = WinStoreWindowPos(pAppName, pKeyName,
hwnd);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos Parameter - pAppName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pAppName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to application name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the application name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos Parameter - pKeyName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pKeyName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to key name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the key name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos Parameter - hwnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwnd (HWND) - input
Window handle for the window to be stored.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pAppName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to application name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the application name.
pKeyName (PSZ) - input
Pointer to key name.
A pointer to a zero-terminated string which contains the key name.
hwnd (HWND) - input
Window handle for the window to be stored.
rc (BOOL) - returns
Success indicator.
TRUE
Successful completion
FALSE
Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos - Remarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function will also save the presentation parameters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinRestoreWindowPos
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinStoreWindowPos - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Remarks
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.27. WinWaitForShell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell - Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This function is specific to Version 4, or higher, of the OS/2 operating
system.
This function allows applications to wait for the Shell to be available.
#define INCL_WINWORKPLACE
#include <os2.h>
ULONG ulEvent; /* Event pointed to. */
BOOL rc; /* Return Code */
rc = WinWaitForShell(ulEvent);
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell Parameter - ulEvent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulEvent (ULONG) - input
Event pointed to.
WWFS_QUERY 0x80000000
WWFS_DESKTOPCREATED 1
WWFS_DESKTOPOPENED 2
WWFS_DESKTOPPOPULATED 3
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell Return Value - rc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rc (BOOL) - returns
Return Code
TRUE Successful completion.
FALSE Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell - Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulEvent (ULONG) - input
Event pointed to.
WWFS_QUERY 0x80000000
WWFS_DESKTOPCREATED 1
WWFS_DESKTOPOPENED 2
WWFS_DESKTOPPOPULATED 3
rc (BOOL) - returns
Return Code
TRUE Successful completion.
FALSE Error occurred.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell - Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
WinWaitForShell is used by an application when it needs to wait for the
Workplace Shell to be available in order for the application to continue. The
application can use WinWaitForShell to wait for the Workplace Shell to be ready
to start receiving the create requests. By using the optional query bit, it
can check on those conditions without waiting on them.
For example, the application might be started in STARTUP.CMD, and yet it wants
to create objects on the Workplace Shell.
It can wait on one of three events:
The desktop object has been created.
The desktop object has been opened.
The desktop object is fully populated.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell - Related Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Related Functions
WinNotebookButtonFromID
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WinWaitForShell - Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select an item:
Syntax
Parameters
Returns
Usage
Related Functions
Glossary
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Data Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following data types are used in Workplace Shell. They are listed in
alphabetic order.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. ACTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Action button data structure.
typedef struct _ACTIONS {
PSZ pszTitle; /* String containing the title of the action button. */
ULONG ulMenuId; /* Desktop menu IDs. */
HPOINTER hIcon; /* The icon handle. */
} ACTIONS;
typedef ACTIONS *PACTIONS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ACTIONS Field - pszTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszTitle (PSZ)
String containing the title of the action button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ACTIONS Field - ulMenuId ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulMenuId (ULONG)
Desktop menu IDs.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ACTIONS Field - hIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hIcon (HPOINTER)
The icon handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. APIRET ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Unsigned integer in the range 0 through 4 294 967 295.
typedef unsigned long APIRET;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. BOOL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Boolean.
Valid values are:
FALSE, which is 0
TRUE, which is 1
typedef unsigned long BOOL;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. BOOL32 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Boolean.
Valid values are:
FALSE, which is 0
TRUE, which is 1
typedef unsigned long BOOL32;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. BYTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A byte.
typedef unsigned char BYTE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. CDATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains date information for a data element in the details view
of a container control.
typedef struct _CDATE {
UCHAR day; /* Current day. */
UCHAR month; /* Current month. */
USHORT year; /* Current year. */
} CDATE;
typedef CDATE *PCDATE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CDATE Field - day ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
day (UCHAR)
Current day.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CDATE Field - month ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
month (UCHAR)
Current month.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CDATE Field - year ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
year (USHORT)
Current year.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. CELL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class-specific cell data follows immediately afterward.
typedef struct _CELL {
ULONG cbData; /* Size of the data that follows. */
} CELL;
typedef CELL *PCELL;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CELL Field - cbData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbData (ULONG)
Size of the data that follows.
Class-specific cell data follows immediately after a variable of this type.
For example the font palette would store the ASCII name of the font, and
the color palette would store the RGB color of the cell.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8. CHAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Single-byte character.
#define CHAR char
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.9. CHARBUNDLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Character-attributes bundle structure.
typedef struct _CHARBUNDLE {
LONG lColor; /* Character foreground color. */
LONG lBackColor; /* Character background color. */
USHORT usMixMode; /* Character foreground-mix mode. */
USHORT usBackMixMode; /* Character background-mix mode. */
USHORT usSet; /* Character set. */
USHORT usPrecision; /* Character precision. */
SIZEF sizfxCell; /* Character cell size. */
POINTL ptlAngle; /* Character angle. */
POINTL ptlShear; /* Character shear. */
USHORT usDirection; /* Character direction. */
USHORT usTextAlign; /* Text alignment. */
FIXED fxExtra; /* Character extra. */
FIXED fxBreakExtra; /* Character break extra. */
} CHARBUNDLE;
typedef CHARBUNDLE *PCHARBUNDLE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - lColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lColor (LONG)
Character foreground color.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - lBackColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lBackColor (LONG)
Character background color.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usMixMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usMixMode (USHORT)
Character foreground-mix mode.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usBackMixMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usBackMixMode (USHORT)
Character background-mix mode.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usSet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usSet (USHORT)
Character set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usPrecision ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usPrecision (USHORT)
Character precision.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - sizfxCell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
sizfxCell (SIZEF)
Character cell size.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - ptlAngle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlAngle (POINTL)
Character angle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - ptlShear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlShear (POINTL)
Character shear.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usDirection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usDirection (USHORT)
Character direction.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - usTextAlign ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usTextAlign (USHORT)
Text alignment.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - fxExtra ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fxExtra (FIXED)
Character extra.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CHARBUNDLE Field - fxBreakExtra ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fxBreakExtra (FIXED)
Character break extra.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.10. CLASS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An array of class objects. The final element of the array should be NULL.
typedef M_WPObject *CLASS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.11. CLASSCRITERIA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Points to a linked list of CRITERIA records for the given class.
typedef struct _CLASSCRITERIA {
struct _CLASSCRITERIA *pNext; /* Pointer to the next class criteria record. */
struct _CLASSCRITERIA *pPrev; /* Pointer to the previous class criteria record. */
M_WPObject *Class; /* Pointer to the class object. */
PCRITERIA pCriteria; /* Pointer to a linked list of CRITERIA records. */
WPObject *NotifyObject; /* The owner of the criteria list. */
} CLASSCRITERIA;
typedef CLASSCRITERIA *PCLASSCRITERIA;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSCRITERIA Field - pNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNext (struct _CLASSCRITERIA *)
Pointer to the next class criteria record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSCRITERIA Field - pPrev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pPrev (struct _CLASSCRITERIA *)
Pointer to the previous class criteria record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSCRITERIA Field - Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class (M_WPObject *)
Pointer to the class object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSCRITERIA Field - pCriteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pCriteria (PCRITERIA)
Pointer to a linked list of CRITERIA records.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSCRITERIA Field - NotifyObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
NotifyObject (WPObject *)
The owner of the criteria list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.12. CLASSDETAILS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class details data structure.
typedef STRUCT _CLASSDETAILS {
PSZ pszAttribute; /* Translatable string. */
PVOID pSortRecord; /* Function pointer for the sort function for the attribute. */
} CLASSDETAILS;
typedef CLASSDETAILS *PCLASSDETAILS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSDETAILS Field - pszAttribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszAttribute (PSZ)
Translatable string.
Translatable string for a class attribute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSDETAILS Field - pSortRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pSortRecord (PVOID)
Function pointer for the sort function for the attribute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.13. CLASSFIELDINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class field information data structure for use with the wpclsQueryDetailsInfo
method.
typedef struct _CLASSFIELDINFO {
ULONG cb; /* Size of the CLASSFIELDINFO structure. */
ULONG flData; /* Attributes of the field's data. */
ULONG flTitle; /* Attributes of the field's title. */
PVOID pTitleData; /* Title data. */
ULONG ulReserved; /* Reserved. */
PVOID pUserData; /* Pointer to user data. */
struct _CLASSFIELDINFO *pNextFieldInfo; /* Pointer to the next linked CLASSFIELDINFO structure. */
ULONG cxWidth; /* Width of the field in pels. */
ULONG offFieldData; /* Offset from beginning of this class's data for this field. */
ULONG ulLenFieldData; /* Width of data in bytes. */
PFNOWNDRW pfnOwnerDraw; /* Ownerdraw procedure for Details View column. */
ULONG flCompare; /* Flags. */
PFNCOMPARE pfnCompare; /* Pointer to a comparison function. */
ULONG DefaultComparison; /* Default comparison operator in the Include Page Criteria dialog box (in the Settings notebook). */
ULONG ulLenCompareValue; /* Maximum length of the compare data. */
PVOID pDefCompareValue; /* The default value to be used for comparisons. */
PVOID pMinCompareValue; /* The default value to be used for comparisons. */
PVOID pMaxCompareValue; /* The default value to be used for comparisons. */
PSZ pszEditControlClass; /* Window class to be used to edit the compare value. */
PFNCOMPARE pfnSort; /* Sort function for this field. */
PSZ pNewComp; /* Pointer to an array of strings containing a description of a comparison type. */
} CLASSFIELDINFO;
typedef CLASSFIELDINFO *PCLASSFIELDINFO;
The CLASSFIELDINFO data structure is similar to the FIELDINFO data structure of
the container control, with the following differences:
The offStruct field from the FIELDINFO data structure is changed to
ulReserved.
Compare, Sort, and Ownerdraw fields (starting at pfnOwnerDraw and
continuing through the end of the structure) have been added so that
object Details View fields can be customized and objects can be found or
included by any of their displayable object Details View fields.
The offFieldData and ulLenFieldData fields have been added.
As an example of the use of these two fields, if an application has the
following details data:
typedef struct _SAMPLE {
CDATE cdate;
CTIME ctime;
PSZ psz;
} SAMPLE;
then
classfieldinfo[0].offFieldData = FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,cdate);
classfieldinfo[0].ulLenFieldData = FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,ctime) -
FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,cdate);
classfieldinfo[1].offFieldData = FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,ctime);
classfieldinfo[1].ulLenFieldData = FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,psz) -
FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,ctime);
classfieldinfo[2].offFieldData = FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,psz);
classfieldinfo[2].ulLenFieldData = sizeof(SAMPLE) -
FIELDOFFSET(SAMPLE,psz);
/* FIELDOFFSET is a macro that calculates the byte offset of a field *
* within a structure. */
Note: It is essential that the fields be linked in the order shown
above-cdate must be followed by ctime, and finally psz.
The pfnCompare and pfnSort fields generally point to the same function, but
they can point to different functions if you want them to behave differently.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Size of the CLASSFIELDINFO structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - flData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flData (ULONG)
Attributes of the field's data.
Possible values are shown in the following list:
Specify one of the following for each column to choose the type of
data that is displayed in each column:
CFA_BITMAPORICON
The column contains bit-map or icon data.
CFA_DATE
The data in the column is displayed in date format. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for date format. Use the
data structure described in CDATE
CFA_STRING
Character or text data is displayed in this column.
CFA_TIME
The data in the column is displayed in time format. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for time format. Use the
data structure described in CTIME.
CFA_ULONG
Unsigned number data is displayed in this column. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for number format.
Specify any or all of the following column attributes:
CFA_FIREADONLY
Prevents text in a FIELDINFO data structure (text in a column)
from being edited directly. This attribute applies only to
columns for which the CFA_STRING attribute has been specified.
CFA_HORZSEPARATOR
A horizontal separator is provided beneath column headings.
CFA_INVISIBLE
Invisible container column. The default is visible.
CFA_OWNER
Ownerdraw is enabled for this container column.
CFA_SEPARATOR
A vertical separator is drawn after this column.
Specify one of the following for each column to vertically position
data in that column:
CFA_BOTTOM
Bottom-justifies field data.
CFA_TOP
Top-justifies field data.
CFA_VCENTER
Vertically centers field data. This is the default.
Specify one of the following for each column to horizontally position
data in that column. These attributes can be combined with the
attributes used for vertical positioning of column data by using an OR
operator (|).
CFA_CENTER
Horizontally centers field data.
CFA_LEFT
Left-justifies field data. This is the default.
CFA_RIGHT
Right-justifies field data.
Specify the following if new comparison descriptions are used:
CFA_NEWCOMP
Tells the system to use strings specified in pNewComp.
Specify the following if a pointer to an object needs to be passed as
the first parameter of a user-defined comparison function:
CFA_OBJECT
Tells the system that the applications wants to use its own
comparison function in which the first parameter is a pointer
to an object. For example:
LONG MyComp(WPObject *obj, PSZ str2)
This flag must be ORed (|) together with one of the type flags
(CFA_BITMAPORICON, CFA_DATE, CFA_STRING, CFA_TIME, or
CFA_ULONG) to tell the object the type that is being compared.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - flTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flTitle (ULONG)
Attributes of the field's title.
Possible values are described in the following list:
Specify the following if icon or bit-map data is to be displayed in
the column heading:
CFA_BITMAPORICON
The column heading contains icon or bit-map data. If
CFA_BITMAPORICON is not specified, any data that is assigned
to a column heading is assumed to be character or text data.
Specify the following to prevent direct editing of a column heading:
CFA_FITITLEREADONLY
Prevents a column heading from being edited directly.
Specify one of the following for each column heading to vertically
position data in that column heading:
CFA_TOP
Top-justifies column headings.
CFA_BOTTOM
Bottom-justifies column headings.
CFA_VCENTER
Vertically centers column headings. This is the default.
Specify one of the following for each column heading to horizontally
position data in that column heading. These attributes can be combined
with the attributes used for vertical positioning of column heading
data by using an OR operator (|).
CFA_CENTER
Horizontally centers column headings.
CFA_LEFT
Left-justifies column headings. This is the default.
CFA_RIGHT
Right-justifies column headings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pTitleData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pTitleData (PVOID)
Title data.
Default is string. If the flTitle field is set to the CFA_BITMAPORICON
attribute, this must be an icon or bit-map handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - ulReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved (ULONG)
Reserved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pUserData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pUserData (PVOID)
Pointer to user data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pNextFieldInfo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNextFieldInfo (struct _CLASSFIELDINFO *)
Pointer to the next linked CLASSFIELDINFO structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - cxWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxWidth (ULONG)
Width of the field in pels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - offFieldData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
offFieldData (ULONG)
Offset from beginning of this class's data for this field.
The first field is zero.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - ulLenFieldData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulLenFieldData (ULONG)
Width of data in bytes.
Four bytes for a pointer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pfnOwnerDraw ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pfnOwnerDraw (PFNOWNDRW)
Ownerdraw procedure for Details View column.
You would use this if you wanted to draw the field in the Details View of
your object. An example of this might be if you wanted to draw a graphic
image in the field.
This field can be NULL except if ownerdraw is being used (that is, if the
object is choosing to draw the field itself).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - flCompare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flCompare (ULONG)
Flags.
Possible values are:
COMPARE_SUPPORTED
Your field can be compared.
SORTBY_SUPPORTED
Your field can be sorted on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pfnCompare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pfnCompare (PFNCOMPARE)
Pointer to a comparison function.
A comparison function is used when the object is doing its own Include Page
filtering (in the Settings notebook).
For example, if a string details field exists, the field could be set to
pfnCompare = StringCompare, where StringCompare is defined as:
LONG StringCompare(PSZ str1, PZS str2)
This field can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - DefaultComparison ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
DefaultComparison (ULONG)
Default comparison operator in the Include Page Criteria dialog box (in the
Settings notebook).
For example, CMP_LESS_OR_EQUAL or CMP_NOT_EQUAL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - ulLenCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulLenCompareValue (ULONG)
Maximum length of the compare data.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pDefCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pDefCompareValue (PVOID)
The default value to be used for comparisons.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pMinCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pMinCompareValue (PVOID)
The default value to be used for comparisons.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pMaxCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pMaxCompareValue (PVOID)
The default value to be used for comparisons.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pszEditControlClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszEditControlClass (PSZ)
Window class to be used to edit the compare value.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pfnSort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pfnSort (PFNCOMPARE)
Sort function for this field.
This function is used when the object is doing its own folder sorting.
Can be NULL unless ownerdraw is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CLASSFIELDINFO Field - pNewComp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNewComp (PSZ)
Pointer to an array of strings containing a description of a comparison
type.
The last element of the string must be NULL.
If new comparison types are added, code must be provided for the comparison
function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.14. CNRINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains information about the container.
typedef struct _CNRINFO {
ULONG cb; /* Structure size. */
PVOID pSortRecord; /* Pointer to the comparison function for sorting container records, or NULL. */
PFIELDINFO pFieldInfoLast; /* Pointer to the last column in the left window of the split details view, or NULL. */
PFIELDINFO pFieldInfoObject; /* Pointer to a column that represents an object in the details view. */
PSZ pszCnrTitle; /* Title text, or NULL. */
ULONG flWindowAttr; /* Window attributes. */
POINTL ptlOrigin; /* Workspace origin. */
ULONG cDelta; /* Threshold. */
ULONG cRecords; /* Number of records. */
SIZEL slBitmapOrIcon; /* Icon/bit-map size. */
SIZEL slTreeBitmapOrIcon; /* Icon/bit-map size. */
HBITMAP hbmExpanded; /* Bit-map handle. */
HBITMAP hbmCollapsed; /* Bit-map handle. */
HPOINTER hptrExpanded; /* Icon handle. */
HPOINTER hptrCollapsed; /* Icon handle. */
LONG cyLineSpacing; /* Vertical space. */
LONG cxTreeIndent; /* Horizontal space. */
LONG cxTreeLine; /* Line width. */
ULONG cFields; /* Number of columns. */
LONG xVertSplitbar; /* Split bar position. */
} CNRINFO;
typedef CNRINFO *PCNRINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Structure size.
The size (in bytes) of the CNRINFO data structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - pSortRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pSortRecord (PVOID)
Pointer to the comparison function for sorting container records, or NULL.
If NULL, which is the default condition, no sorting is performed. Sorting
occurs only during record insertion and when changing the value of this
field. The third parameter of the comparison function, pStorage, must be
NULL. See "CM_SORTRECORD" in the Presentation Manager Programming Reference
for a further description of the comparison function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - pFieldInfoLast ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pFieldInfoLast (PFIELDINFO)
Pointer to the last column in the left window of the split details view, or
NULL.
The default is NULL, which causes all columns to be positioned in the left
window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - pFieldInfoObject ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pFieldInfoObject (PFIELDINFO)
Pointer to a column that represents an object in the details view.
The data for this FIELDINFO structure must contain icons or bit maps.
In-use emphasis is applied to this column of icons or bit maps only. The
default is the leftmost column in the unsplit details view or the leftmost
column in the left window of the split details view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - pszCnrTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszCnrTitle (PSZ)
Title text, or NULL.
Text for the container title. The default is NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - flWindowAttr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flWindowAttr (ULONG)
Window attributes.
Consists of container window attributes.
Specify one of the following container views, which determine the
presentation format of items in a container:
CV_ICON
In the icon view, the container items are represented as
icon/text or bit-map/text pairs, with text beneath the icons
or bit maps. This is the default view. This view can be
combined with the CV_MINI style bit by using an OR operator
(|).
CV_NAME
In the name view, the container items are represented as
icon/text or bit-map/text pairs, with text to the right of the
icons or bit maps. This view can be combined with the CV_MINI
and CV_FLOW style bits by using OR operators (|).
CV_TEXT
In the text view, the container items are displayed as a list
of text strings. This view can be combined with the CV_FLOW
style bit by using an OR operator (|).
CV_TREE
In the tree view, the container items are represented in a
hierarchical manner. The tree view has three forms, which are
defined in the following list. If you specify CV_TREE by
itself, the tree icon view is used.
- Tree icon view
The tree icon view is specified by using a logical OR
operator to combine the tree view with the icon view
(CV_TREE | CV_ICON). Container items in this view are
represented as icon/text pairs or bit-map/text pairs,
with text to the right of the icons or bit maps. Also, a
collapsed or expanded icon or bit map is displayed to the
left of parent items. If this icon or bit map is a
collapsed icon or bit map, selecting it will cause the
parent item to be expanded so that its child items are
displayed below it. If this icon or bit map is an
expanded icon or bit map, selecting it will cause the
parent's child items to be removed from the display. The
default collapsed and expanded bit maps provided by the
container use a plus sign (+) and a minus sign (-),
respectively, to indicate that items can be added to or
subtracted from the display.
- Tree name view
The tree name view is specified by using a logical OR
operator to combine the tree view with the name view
(CV_TREE | CV_NAME). Container items in this view are
displayed as either icon/text pairs or bit-map/text
pairs, with text to the right of the icons or bit maps.
However, the indicator that represents whether an item
can be collapsed or expanded, such as a plus or minus
sign, is included in the icon or bit map that represents
that item, not in a separate icon or bit map as in the
tree icon and tree text views. The container control does
not provide default collapsed and expanded bit maps for
the tree name view.
- Tree text view
The tree text view is specified by using a logical OR
operator to combine the tree view with the text view
(CV_TREE | CV_TEXT). Container items in this view are
displayed as a list of text strings. As in the tree icon
view, a collapsed or expanded icon or bit map is
displayed to the left of parent items.
CV_DETAIL
In the details view, the container items are presented in
columns. Each column can contain icons or bit maps, text,
numbers, dates, or times.
Specify one or both of the following view styles by using an OR
operator (|) to combine them with the specified view. These view
styles are optional.
CV_MINI
Produces a mini-icon whose size is based on the Presentation
Manager (PM) SV_CYMENU system value to produce a
device-dependent mini-icon.
The CV_MINI view style bit is ignored when:
- The text view (CV_TEXT), tree view (CV_TREE), or details
view (CV_DETAIL) are displayed
- The CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified.
If this style bit is not specified and the icon view (CV_ICON)
or name view (CV_NAME) is used, the default, regular-sized
icon is used. The size of regular-sized icons is based on the
value in the slBitmapOrIcon field of the CNRINFO data
structure. If this field is equal to 0, the PM SV_CXICON and
SV_CYICON system values for width and height, respectively,
are used. Icon sizes are consistent with PM-defined icon sizes
for all devices.
CV_FLOW
Dynamically arranges container items in columns in the name
and text views. These are called flowed name and flowed text
views. If this style bit is set for the name view (CV_NAME) or
text view (CV_TEXT), the container items are placed in a
single column until the bottom of the client area is reached.
The next container item is placed in the adjacent column to
the right of the filled column. This process is repeated until
all of the container items are positioned in the container.
The width of each column is determined by the longest text
string in that column. The size of the window determines the
depth of the client area.
If this style bit is not specified, the default condition for
the name and text views is to vertically fill the container in
a single column without flowing the container items. If this
style bit is set for the icon view (CV_ICON) or details view
(CV_DETAIL), it is ignored.
Specify either of the following to indicate whether the container will
display icons or bit maps:
CA_DRAWICON
Icons are used for the icon, name, tree, or details views.
This is the default. This container attribute should be used
with the hptrIcon and hptrMiniIcon fields of the RECORDCORE
data structure.
CA_DRAWBITMAP
Bit maps are used for the icon, name, tree, or details views.
This container attribute can be used with the hbmBitmap and
hbmMiniBitmap fields of the RECORDCORE data structure.
Notes
1. If both the CA_DRAWICON and CA_DRAWBITMAP attributes are
specified, the CA_DRAWICON attribute is used.
2. If the CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified when a
container is created, the hptrIcon field of the
MINIRECORDCORE data structure is used.
Specify one of the following attributes to provide target emphasis for
the name, text, and details views. If neither ordered nor mixed target
emphasis is specified, the emphasis is drawn around the record.
CA_ORDEREDTARGETEMPH
Shows where a container record can be dropped during direct
manipulation by drawing a line beneath the record. Ordered
target emphasis does not apply to the icon and tree views.
CA_MIXEDTARGETEMPH
Shows where a container record can be dropped during direct
manipulation either by drawing a line between two items or by
drawing lines around the container record. Mixed target
emphasis does not apply to the icon and tree views.
Specify the following attribute to draw lines that show the
relationship between items in the tree view.
CA_TREELINE
Shows the relationship between all items in the tree view.
Specify the following to draw container records, paint the background
of the container, or both:
CA_OWNERDRAW
Ownerdraw for the container, which allows the application to
draw container records.
CA_OWNERPAINTBACKGROUND
Allows the application to subclass the container and paint the
background. If specified, and the container is subclassed, the
application receives the CM_PAINTBACKGROUND message in the
subclass procedure. Otherwise, the container paints the
background using the color specified by SYSCLR_WINDOW, which
can be changed by using the PP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR or
PP_BACKGROUNDCOLORINDEX presentation parameter in the
WM_PRESPARAMCHANGED (in Container Controls)
Specify the following if the container is to have a title:
CA_CONTAINERTITLE
Allows you to include a container title. The default is no
container title.
Specify one or both of the following container title attributes. These
are valid only if the CA_CONTAINERTITLE attribute is specified.
CA_TITLEREADONLY
Prevents the container title from being edited directly. The
default is to allow the container title to be edited.
CA_TITLESEPARATOR
Puts a separator line between the container title and the
records beneath it. The default is no separator line.
Specify one of the following to position the container title. These
are valid only if the CA_CONTAINERTITLE attribute is specified.
CA_TITLECENTER
Centers the container title. This is the default.
CA_TITLELEFT
Left-justifies the container title.
CA_TITLERIGHT
Right-justifies the container title.
Specify the following to display column headings in the details view:
CA_DETAILSVIEWTITLES
Allows you to include column headings in the details view. The
default is no column headings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - ptlOrigin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlOrigin (POINTL)
Workspace origin.
Lower-left origin of the workspace in virtual coordinates, used in the icon
view. The default origin is (0,0).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cDelta ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cDelta (ULONG)
Threshold.
An application-defined threshold, or number of records, from either end of
the list of available records. Used when a container needs to handle large
amounts of data. The default is 0. See the OS/2 Programming Guide for more
information about specifying deltas.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cRecords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cRecords (ULONG)
Number of records.
The number of records in the container. Initially, this field is 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - slBitmapOrIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
slBitmapOrIcon (SIZEL)
Icon/bit-map size.
The size (in pels) of icons or bit maps. The default is the system size.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - slTreeBitmapOrIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
slTreeBitmapOrIcon (SIZEL)
Icon/bit-map size.
The size (in pels) of the expanded and collapsed icons or bit maps used in
the tree icon and tree text views.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - hbmExpanded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmExpanded (HBITMAP)
Bit-map handle.
The handle of the bit map to be used to represent an expanded parent item
in the tree icon and tree text views. If neither an icon handle (see
hptrExpanded) nor a bit-map handle is specified, a default bit map with a
minus sign (-) is provided.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - hbmCollapsed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmCollapsed (HBITMAP)
Bit-map handle.
The handle of the bit map to be used to represent a collapsed parent item
in the tree icon and tree text views. If neither an icon handle (see
hptrCollapsed) nor a bit-map handle is specified, a default bit map with a
plus sign (+) is provided.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - hptrExpanded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrExpanded (HPOINTER)
Icon handle.
The handle of the icon to be used to represent an expanded parent item in
the tree icon and tree text views. If neither an icon handle nor a bit-map
handle (see hbmExpanded) is specified, a default bit map with a minus sign
(-) is provided.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - hptrCollapsed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrCollapsed (HPOINTER)
Icon handle.
The handle of the icon to be used to represent a collapsed parent item in
the tree icon and tree text views. If neither an icon handle nor a bit-map
handle (see hbmCollapsed) is specified, a default bit map with a plus sign
(+) is provided.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cyLineSpacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cyLineSpacing (LONG)
Vertical space.
The amount of vertical space (in pels) between the records. If you specify
a value that is less than 0, a default value is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cxTreeIndent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxTreeIndent (LONG)
Horizontal space.
The amount of horizontal space (in pels) between levels in the tree view.
If you specify a value that is less than 0, a default value is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cxTreeLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxTreeLine (LONG)
Line width.
The width of the lines (in pels) that show the relationship between tree
items. If you specify a value that is less than 0, a default value is used.
Also, if the CA_TREELINE container attribute of the flWindowAttr field is
not specified, these lines are not drawn.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - cFields ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cFields (ULONG)
Number of columns.
The number of FIELDINFO structures in the container. Initially, this field
is 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CNRINFO Field - xVertSplitbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xVertSplitbar (LONG)
Split bar position.
The initial position of the split bar relative to the container used in the
details view. If this value is less than 0, the split bar is not used. The
default value is negative one (-1).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.15. CRITERIA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Details comparison criteria structure.
typedef struct _CRITERIA {
PVOID pReserved; /* Reserved. Set to NULL. */
struct _CRITERIA *pNext; /* Pointer to the next criteria record. */
struct _CRITERIA *pPrev; /* Pointer to the previous criteria record. */
ULONG ClassFieldInfoIndex; /* Index of the detaild field. */
ULONG LogicalOperator; /* CRITERIA_AND or CRITERIA_OR */
ULONG ComparisonType; /* The comparison type. */
ULONG ulLenCompareValue; /* Sizeof(ComparisonData). */
CHAR CompareValue[1]; /* Value to be compared with. */
} CRITERIA;
typedef CRITERIA *PCRITERIA;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - pReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pReserved (PVOID)
Reserved. Set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - pNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNext (struct _CRITERIA *)
Pointer to the next criteria record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - pPrev ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pPrev (struct _CRITERIA *)
Pointer to the previous criteria record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - ClassFieldInfoIndex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ClassFieldInfoIndex (ULONG)
Index of the detaild field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - LogicalOperator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
LogicalOperator (ULONG)
CRITERIA_AND or CRITERIA_OR
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - ComparisonType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ComparisonType (ULONG)
The comparison type.
May be one of the following values:
CMP_EQUAL
CMP_GREATER
CMP_LESS
CMP_GREATER_OR_EQUAL
CMP_LESS_OR_EQUAL
CMP_NO_EQUAL
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - ulLenCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulLenCompareValue (ULONG)
Sizeof(ComparisonData).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CRITERIA Field - CompareValue[1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
CompareValue[1] (CHAR)
Value to be compared with.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.16. CTIME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains time information for a data element in the details view
of a container control.
typedef struct _CTIME {
UCHAR hours; /* Current hour. */
UCHAR minutes; /* Current minute. */
UCHAR seconds; /* Current second. */
UCHAR ucReserved; /* Reserved. */
} CTIME;
typedef CTIME *PCTIME;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CTIME Field - hours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hours (UCHAR)
Current hour.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CTIME Field - minutes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
minutes (UCHAR)
Current minute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CTIME Field - seconds ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
seconds (UCHAR)
Current second.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> CTIME Field - ucReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ucReserved (UCHAR)
Reserved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.17. DEVOPENSTRUC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Open-device data structure.
typedef struct _DEVOPENSTRUC {
PSZ pszLogAddress; /* Logical address. */
PSZ pszDriverName; /* Driver name. */
PDRIVDATA pdriv; /* Driver data. */
PSZ pszDataType; /* Data type. */
PSZ pszComment; /* Comment. */
PSZ pszQueueProcName; /* Queue-processor name. */
PSZ pszQueueProcParams; /* Queue-processor parameters. */
PSZ pszSpoolerParams; /* Spooler parameters. */
PSZ pszNetworkParams; /* Network parameters. */
} DEVOPENSTRUC;
typedef DEVOPENSTRUC *PDEVOPENSTRUC;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszLogAddress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszLogAddress (PSZ)
Logical address.
This is required for an OD_DIRECT device being opened with DevOpenDC; it is
the logical device address, such as "LPT1" on OS/2. Some drivers may accept
a file name for this parameter or even a named pipe.
Where output is to be queued (for an OD_QUEUED device), this is the name of
the queue for the output device. The queue name can be a UNC name.
Note: This parameter can be a port name for a printer device context.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszDriverName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszDriverName (PSZ)
Driver name.
Character string identifying the printer driver, for example, LASERJET. The
Default Device Driver field of the PRQINFO3 structure, associated with the
required print queue, gives the driver and device name, separated by a
period, for example LASERJET.HP LaserJet IIID. It can contain only the name
up to the period, for example LASERJET.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pdriv ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pdriv (PDRIVDATA)
Driver data.
Data that is to be passed directly to the PM device driver. Whether any of
this is required depends upon the device driver.
For printer device context, this is a pointer to the job properties data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszDataType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszDataType (PSZ)
Data type.
For an OD_QUEUED or OD_DIRECT device, this parameter defines the type of
data that is to be queued as follows:
PM_Q_STD Standard format
PM_Q_RAW Raw format
Note that a device driver can define other data types.
For OD_QUEUED or OD_DIRECT defice types, the default is supplied by the
device driver if pszDataType is not specified. For any other device type,
pszDataType is ignored.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszComment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszComment (PSZ)
Comment.
Optional character string that the printer object displays to the user in a
job settings notebook. It is recommended that the application include its
own name in this comment string.
Note: The job title text is derived from the document name passed to
DevEscape (DEVESC_STARTDOC).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszQueueProcName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszQueueProcName (PSZ)
Queue-processor name.
This is the name of the queue processor, for queued output, and is usually
the default.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszQueueProcParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszQueueProcParams (PSZ)
Queue-processor parameters.
Queue processor parameters (optional). They can include information such as
the number of copies you want to print and the size of the output area on
the printed page.
The first parameter (COP) is used for all spool-file formats. The remaining
parameters are valid for PM_Q_STD spool files only. Because PM_Q_STD data
are used mainly for graphic data, these parameters are described in
relation to the printing of picture files.
The PMPRINT/PMPLOT queue-processor parameters are separated by spaces and
are:
COP=n
The COP parameter specifies the number of copies of the spool file
that you want printed. The value of n must be an integer in the
range of 1 through 999.
The default is COP=1.
ARE=C | w,h,l,t
The ARE parameter determines the size and position of the output
area. This is the area of the physical page to which printing is
restricted.
The default value of ARE=C means that the output area is the whole
page. Note, however, that the printer cannot print outside its own
device clip limits.
To size and position the output area at a specific point on the
page, use ARE=w,h,l,t, where:
w, h are the width and height of the desired output
area.
l, t are the offsets of the upper-left corner of
the output area from the left (l) and from the
top (t) of the maximum output area.
These four values must be given as percentages of the maximum
output dimensions. The maximum output area is the area within the
device clip limits.
FIT=S | l,t
The FIT parameter determines which part of the picture is to be
printed. You can request the whole of the picture, scaled to fit
the output area; or you can position the picture (actual size)
anywhere within the output area. This could mean that the picture
is clipped at the boundaries of the output area.
The default value of FIT=S causes the output to be scaled until
the larger of the height or width just fits within the defined
output area. The aspect ratio of the picture is maintained.
To print the picture in actual size, use FIT=l,t, where l,t are
the coordinates of the point in the picture that you want
positioned at the center of the output area: l is measured from
the left edge of the picture; and t is measured from the top edge.
The coordinates must be given as percentages of the actual
dimensions of the picture.
XFM=0 | 1
The XFM parameter enables you to override the picture-positioning
and clipping instructions that are provided by the ARE and FIT
parameters, including their defaults.
The default value of XFM=1 allows the appearance of the output to
be determined by the settings of the ARE and FIT parameters.
A value of XFM=0 yields output as specified in the picture file.
For example, applications that use many different forms can define
different positions on each form for their output.
COL=M | C
The COL parameter enables you to specify color output if you have
a color printer.
A value of COL=M creates monochrome output (black foreground with
no background color). This is supported by all devices.
A value of COL=C creates color output. If you request color output
on a monochrome device, the printer presentation driver tries to
satisfy your request, which can cause problems because the only
color available is black. For example, if the picture file
specifies a red line on a blue background, both are drawn in
black.
The default is COL=M when you are addressing a monochrome printer
and COL=C when you are addressing a color printer.
MAP=N | A
The MAP parameter enables you to decide how the neutral colors
(those that are not specified in the picture file) are printed.
The default value of MAP=N yields a normal representation of the
screen picture on a printed page, which means that the page
background is white and the foreground is black.
A value of MAP=A provides the reverse of the normal
representation: the background is black and the foreground is
white on the printed page.
CDP=codepage
The CDP parameter overrides the code page to being used for
PM_Q_RAW print jobs. The print queue driver uses DEVESC_SETMODE to
set the code page, but not all printer drivers support this device
escape.
XLT=0 | 1
The XLT parameter can eliminate the translation component when
printing a metafile if XLT=1.
When the resolution of the device is higher than that of the world
coordinate space, a small translation of world coordinate point
(0,0) occurs on the device to preserve the accuracy of the mapping
from world to device coordinate units. For example, (0,0) becomes
(1,1) if there are 3 pels to every world coordinate.
Normally, this is not noticeable, but it can be a problem with
some devices. For example, in order to draw a complete row of 80
characters using a device font, a device may require the text to
start at device coordinate position zero. Starting at a position
other than zero may cause one or more characters at the end of the
row to be clipped. In such cases, elimination of the translation
is important and can be accomplished by specifying XLT=1.
The default is XLT=0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszSpoolerParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszSpoolerParams (PSZ)
Spooler parameters.
Spooler parameters (optional) are separated by spaces. They are used for
scheduling print jobs and are as follows:
The form names that identify the paper to be used, for example,
FORM=A4,A5,ENV. The form names are optional; but if they are provided,
the spooler is able to hold off printing the jobs until the required
form is installed in the printer. If the form name is not provided,
the spooler attempts to print the job. The printer driver recognizes
that there is a forms problem and displays a FORMS MISMATCH message
box.
Priority of the print job, for example, PRTY=60. The priority is
specified as an integer in the range 1 through 99; 99 is the highest.
The default priority value is 50. The application can use the spooler
priority parameter to prioritize its own jobs; however, it is not good
practice for an application always to use priority 99 in an attempt to
get its jobs printed first.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DEVOPENSTRUC Field - pszNetworkParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszNetworkParams (PSZ)
Network parameters.
Optional parameter that can be used to specify network options; for
example, USER=JOESMITH.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.18. DRAGIMAGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Dragged-object-image structure which describes the images that are to be drawn
under the direct-manipulation pointer for the duration of a drag operation.
typedef struct _DRAGIMAGE {
USHORT cb; /* Size, in bytes, of the DRAGIMAGE structure. */
USHORT cptl; /* The number of points in the point array if fl is specified as DRG_POLYGON. */
LHANDLE hImage; /* Handle representing the image to display. */
SIZEL sizlStretch; /* Dimensions for stretching when fl is specified as DRG_STRETCH. */
ULONG fl; /* Flags. */
SHORT cxOffset; /* X-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image. */
SHORT cyOffset; /* Y-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image. */
} DRAGIMAGE;
typedef DRAGIMAGE *PDRAGIMAGE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (USHORT)
Size, in bytes, of the DRAGIMAGE structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - cptl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cptl (USHORT)
The number of points in the point array if fl is specified as DRG_POLYGON.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - hImage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hImage (LHANDLE)
Handle representing the image to display.
The type is determined by fl.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - sizlStretch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
sizlStretch (SIZEL)
Dimensions for stretching when fl is specified as DRG_STRETCH.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - fl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fl (ULONG)
Flags.
DRG_ICON
hImage is an HPOINTER.
DRG_BITMAP
hImage is an HBITMAP.
DRG_POLYGON
hImage is a pointer to an array of points that will be connected
with GpiPolyLine to form a polygon. The first point of the array
should be (0,0), and the other points should be placed relative to
this position.
DRG_STRETCH
If DRG_ICON or DRG_BITMAP is specified, the image is expanded or
compressed to the dimensions specified by sizlStretch.
DRG_TRANSPARENT
If DRG_ICON is specified, an outline of the icon is generated and
displayed instead of the original icon.
DRG_CLOSED
If DRG_POLYGON is specified, a closed polygon is formed by moving
the current position to the last point in the array before calling
GpiPolyLine.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - cxOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxOffset (SHORT)
X-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGIMAGE Field - cyOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cyOffset (SHORT)
Y-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.19. DRAGINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Drag-information structure.
typedef struct _DRAGINFO {
ULONG cbDraginfo; /* Structure size, in bytes. */
USHORT cbDragitem; /* Size, in bytes, of each DRAGITEM structure. */
USHORT usOperation; /* Modified drag operations. */
HWND hwndSource; /* Window handle of the source of the drag operation. */
SHORT xDrop; /* X-coordinate of drop point expressed in desktop coordinates. */
SHORT yDrop; /* Y-coordinate of drop point expressed in desktop coordinates. */
USHORT cditem; /* Count of DRAGITEM structures. */
USHORT usReserved; /* Reserved. */
} DRAGINFO;
typedef DRAGINFO *PDRAGINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - cbDraginfo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbDraginfo (ULONG)
Structure size, in bytes.
The size includes the array of DRAGITEM structures.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - cbDragitem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbDragitem (USHORT)
Size, in bytes, of each DRAGITEM structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - usOperation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usOperation (USHORT)
Modified drag operations.
An application can define its own modified drag operations for use when
simulating a drop. These operations must have a value greater than
DO_UNKNOWN. Possible values are described in the following list:
DO_DEFAULT
Execute the default drag operation. No modifier keys are
pressed.
DO_COPY
Execute a copy operation. The Ctrl key is pressed.
DO_LINK
Execute a link operation. The Ctrl+Shift keys are
pressed.
DO_MOVE
Execute a move operation. The Shift key is pressed.
DO_CREATE
Execute a create operation. (A template is being
dropped.)
DO_NEW
Execute a create another operation. This value should be
defined as DO_UNKNOWN+3 if it is not recognized in the
current level of the toolkit.
DO_UNKNOWN
An undefined combination of modifier keys is pressed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - hwndSource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndSource (HWND)
Window handle of the source of the drag operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - xDrop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xDrop (SHORT)
X-coordinate of drop point expressed in desktop coordinates.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - yDrop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yDrop (SHORT)
Y-coordinate of drop point expressed in desktop coordinates.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - cditem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cditem (USHORT)
Count of DRAGITEM structures.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGINFO Field - usReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usReserved (USHORT)
Reserved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.20. DRAGITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Drag-object structure.
typedef struct _DRAGITEM {
HWND hwndItem; /* Window handle of the source of the drag operation. */
ULONG ulItemID; /* Information used by the source to identify the object being dragged. */
HSTR hstrType; /* String handle of the object type. */
HSTR hstrRMF; /* String handle of the rendering mechanism and format. */
HSTR hstrContainerName; /* String handle of the name of the container holding the source object. */
HSTR hstrSourceName; /* String handle of the name of the source object. */
HSTR hstrTargetName; /* String handle of the suggested name of the object at the target. */
SHORT cxOffset; /* X-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image that represents this object. */
SHORT cyOffset; /* Y-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image that represents this object. */
USHORT fsControl; /* Source-object control flags. */
USHORT fsSupportedOps; /* Direct manipulation operations supported by the source object. */
} DRAGITEM;
typedef DRAGITEM *PDRAGITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hwndItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndItem (HWND)
Window handle of the source of the drag operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - ulItemID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulItemID (ULONG)
Information used by the source to identify the object being dragged.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hstrType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrType (HSTR)
String handle of the object type.
The string handle must be created using the DrgAddStrHandle function. The
string is of the form:
type[,type...]
The first type in the list must be the true type of the object. The
following types are used by the OS/2* shell:
DRT_ASM
Assembler code
DRT_BASIC
BASIC code
DRT_BINDATA
Binary data
DRT_BITMAP
Bit map
DRT_C
C code
DRT_COBOL
COBOL code
DRT_DLL
Dynamic link library
DRT_DOSCMD
DOS command file
DRT_EXE
Executable file
DRT_FONT
Font
DRT_FORTRAN
FORTRAN code
DRT_ICON
Icon
DRT_LIB
Library
DRT_METAFILE
Metafile
DRT_OS2CMD
OS/2 command file
DRT_PASCAL
Pascal code
DRT_RESOURCE
Resource file
DRT_TEXT
Text
DRT_UNKNOWN
Unknown type.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hstrRMF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrRMF (HSTR)
String handle of the rendering mechanism and format.
The string handle must be created using the DrgAddStrHandle function. The
string is of the form:
mechfmt[,mechfmt...]
where mechfmt can be in either of the following formats:
<mechanism(1),format(1)>
(mechanism(1)[, mechanism(n)...]), (format(1)[,format(n)...])
The first mechanism/format pair must be the native rendering mechanism and
format of the object.
Valid mechanisms are:
"DRM_DDE" Dynamic data exchange
"DRM_OBJECT" Item being dragged is a Workplace Shell object
"DRM_OS2FILE" OS/2 file
"DRM_PRINT" Object can be printed using direct manipulation.
Valid formats are:
"DRF_BITMAP" OS/2 bit map
"DRF_DIB" DIB
"DRF_DIF" DIF
"DRF_DSPBITMAP" Stream of bit-map bits
"DRF_METAFILE" Metafile
"DRF_OEMTEXT" OEM text
"DRF_OWNERDISPLAY" Bit stream
"DRF_PTRPICT" Printer picture
"DRF_RTF" Rich text
"DRF_SYLK" SYLK
"DRF_TEXT" Null-terminated string
"DRF_TIFF" TIFF
"DRF_UNKNOWN" Unknown format.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hstrContainerName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrContainerName (HSTR)
String handle of the name of the container holding the source object.
The string handle must be created using the DrgAddStrHandle function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hstrSourceName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrSourceName (HSTR)
String handle of the name of the source object.
The string handle must be created using the DrgAddStrHandle function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - hstrTargetName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrTargetName (HSTR)
String handle of the suggested name of the object at the target.
It is the responsibility of the source of the drag operation to create this
string handle before calling DrgDrag.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - cxOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxOffset (SHORT)
X-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image that
represents this object.
This value is copied from cxOffset in the DRAGIMAGE structure by DrgDrag.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - cyOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cyOffset (SHORT)
Y-offset from the pointer hot spot to the origin of the image that
represents this object.
This value is copied from cyOffset in the DRAGIMAGE structure by DrgDrag.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - fsControl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsControl (USHORT)
Source-object control flags.
DC_OPEN
Object is open
DC_REF
Reference to another object
DC_GROUP
Group of objects
DC_CONTAINER
Container of other objects
DC_PREPARE
Source requires a DM_RENDERPREPARE message before it establishes a
data transfer conversation
DC_REMOVEABLEMEDIA
Object is on removable media, or object cannot be recovered after a
move operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGITEM Field - fsSupportedOps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsSupportedOps (USHORT)
Direct manipulation operations supported by the source object.
DO_COPYABLE
Source supports DO_COPY
DO_LINKABLE
Source supports DO_LINK
DO_MOVEABLE
Source supports DO_MOVE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.21. DRAGTRANSFER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Drag-conversation structure.
typedef struct _DRAGTRANSFER {
ULONG cb; /* Size, in bytes, of the structure. */
HWND hwndClient; /* Handle of the client window. */
PDRAGITEM pditem; /* Pointer to the DRAGITEM structure that is to be rendered. */
HSTR hstrSelectedRMF; /* String handle for the selected rendering mechanism and format for the transfer operation. */
HSTR hstrRenderToName; /* String handle representing the name where the source places, and the target finds, the data that is rendered. */
ULONG ulTargetInfo; /* Reserved. */
USHORT usOperation; /* The operation. */
USHORT fsReply; /* Reply flags. */
} DRAGTRANSFER;
typedef DRAGTRANSFER *PDRAGTRANSFER;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Size, in bytes, of the structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - hwndClient ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndClient (HWND)
Handle of the client window.
This can be the target window or a window that represents an object in a
container that was dropped on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - pditem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pditem (PDRAGITEM)
Pointer to the DRAGITEM structure that is to be rendered.
This structure must exist within the DRAGINFO structure that was passed in
the DM_DROP message.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - hstrSelectedRMF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrSelectedRMF (HSTR)
String handle for the selected rendering mechanism and format for the
transfer operation.
This handle must be created using DrgAddStrHandle. The target is
responsible for deleting this handle when the conversation is complete. The
string is in the format: <mechanism,format>.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - hstrRenderToName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hstrRenderToName (HSTR)
String handle representing the name where the source places, and the target
finds, the data that is rendered.
The target is responsible for deleting this string handle when the
conversation terminates. The contents of this field vary according to the
rendering mechanism. See the hstrRMF field in DRAGITEM.
OS/2 File The string handle represents the fully qualified name of
the file where the rendering will be placed.
DDE This field is not used.
Print This field is not used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - ulTargetInfo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulTargetInfo (ULONG)
Reserved.
Reserved for use by the target. The target can use this field for
information about the object and rendering operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - usOperation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usOperation (USHORT)
The operation.
Values are:
DO_COPY
Execute a copy operation.
DO_LINK
Execute a link operation.
DO_MOVE
Execute a move operation.
DO_CREATE
Execute a create operation.
DO_NEW
Execute a create another operation. This value should be
defined as DO_UNKNOWN+3 if it is not recognized in the
current level of the toolkit.
Other
Execute an application-defined operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRAGTRANSFER Field - fsReply ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsReply (USHORT)
Reply flags.
Reply flags for the message. These flags can be set as follows:
DMFL_NATIVERENDER
The source does not support rendering for this object. A source
should not set this flag unless it provides sufficient information
at the time of the drop for the target to perform the rendering
operation. The target must send DM_ENDCONVERSATION to the source
after carrying out the rendering operation or when it elects not to
do a native rendering.
DMFL_RENDERRETRY
The source supports rendering for the object but does not support
the selected rendering mechanism and format. The target can try
another mechanism and format by sending another DM_RENDER message.
If the target does not retry, it must send a DM_RENDERCOMPLETE
message to the source. This flag is set in conjunction with the
DMFL_NATIVERENDER flag.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.22. DRIVDATA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Driver-data structure.
typedef struct _DRIVDATA {
LONG cb; /* Length. */
LONG lVersion; /* Version. */
CHAR szDeviceName[32]; /* Device name. */
CHAR abGeneralData[1]; /* General data. */
} DRIVDATA;
typedef DRIVDATA *PDRIVDATA;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRIVDATA Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (LONG)
Length.
The length of the structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRIVDATA Field - lVersion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lVersion (LONG)
Version.
The version number of the data. Version numbers are defined by particular
PM device drivers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRIVDATA Field - szDeviceName[32] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szDeviceName[32] (CHAR)
Device name.
A string in a 32-byte field identifying the particular device (model
number, and so on). Again, valid values are defined by PM device drivers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> DRIVDATA Field - abGeneralData[1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
abGeneralData[1] (CHAR)
General data.
Data as defined by the Presentation Manager device driver.
The data type of this field is defined by the Presentation Manager device
driver. It does not contain pointers, as these are not necessarily valid
when passed to the device driver.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.23. EDITCTLINIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This structure is passed to a details criteria edit window when it is created,
so that is knows the current calue and min/max values for the criteria to be
edited.
As you modify the compare value using the criteria edit window, you should
update the buffer pointed to by pCompareValue.
typedef struct _EDITCTLINIT {
ULONG cb; /* Length of this structure. */
PVOID pCompareValue; /* Buffer containing the current value. */
ULONG ulLenCompareValue; /* Length of the pCompareValue buffer. */
PVOID pMinCompareValue; /* Set to NULL. */
PVOID pMaxCompareValue; /* Set to NULL. */
} EDITCTLINIT;
typedef EDITCTLINIT *PEDITCTLINIT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EDITCTLINIT Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Length of this structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EDITCTLINIT Field - pCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pCompareValue (PVOID)
Buffer containing the current value.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EDITCTLINIT Field - ulLenCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulLenCompareValue (ULONG)
Length of the pCompareValue buffer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EDITCTLINIT Field - pMinCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pMinCompareValue (PVOID)
Set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> EDITCTLINIT Field - pMaxCompareValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pMaxCompareValue (PVOID)
Set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.24. FATTRS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Font-attributes structure.
typedef struct _FATTRS {
USHORT usRecordLength; /* Length of record. */
USHORT fsSelection; /* Selection indicators. */
LONG lMatch; /* Matched-font identity. */
CHAR szFacename[FACESIZE]; /* Typeface name. */
USHORT idRegistry; /* Registry identifier. */
USHORT usCodePage; /* Code page. */
LONG lMaxBaselineExt; /* Maximum baseline extension. */
LONG lAveCharWidth; /* Average character width. */
USHORT fsType; /* Type indicators. */
USHORT fsFontUse; /* Font-use indicators. */
} FATTRS;
typedef FATTRS *PFATTRS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - usRecordLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usRecordLength (USHORT)
Length of record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - fsSelection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsSelection (USHORT)
Selection indicators.
Flags causing the following features to be simulated by the system.
Note: If an italic flag is applied to a font that is itself defined as
italic, the font is slanted further by italic simulation.
Underscore or strikeout lines are drawn using the appropriate attributes
(for example, color) from the character bundle (see the CHARBUNDLE
datatype), not the line bundle (see LINEBUNDLE). The width of the line, and
the vertical position of the line in font space, are determined by the
font. Horizontally, the line starts from a point in font space directly
above or below the start point of each character, and extends to a point
directly above or below the escapement point for that character.
For this purpose, the start and escapement points are those applicable to
left-to-right or right-to-left character directions (see
GpiSetCharDirection in Graphics Programming Interface Programming
Reference), even if the string is currently being drawn in a top-to-bottom
or bottom-to-top direction.
For left-to-right or right-to-left directions, any white space generated by
the character extra and character break extra attributes (see
GpiSetCharExtra and GpiSetCharBreakExtra in Graphics Programming Interface
Programming Reference), as well as increments provided by the vector of
increments on GpiCharStringPos and GpiCharStringPosAt, are also
underlined/overstruck, so that in these cases the line is continuous for
the string.
FATTR_SEL_ITALIC Generate italic font.
FATTR_SEL_UNDERSCORE Generate underscored font.
FATTR_SEL_BOLD Generate bold font. (Note that the
resulting characters are wider than
those in the original font.)
FATTR_SEL_STRIKEOUT Generate font with overstruck
characters.
FATTR_SEL_OUTLINE Use an outline font with hollow
characters. If this flag is not set,
outline font characters are filled.
Setting this flag normally gives better
performance, and for sufficiently small
characters (depending on device
resolution) there may be little visual
difference.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - lMatch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lMatch (LONG)
Matched-font identity.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - szFacename[FACESIZE] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szFacename[FACESIZE] (CHAR)
Typeface name.
The typeface name of the font, for example, Tms Rmn.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - idRegistry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
idRegistry (USHORT)
Registry identifier.
Font registry identifier (zero if unknown).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - usCodePage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usCodePage (USHORT)
Code page.
If zero, the current Gpi code page (see GpiSetCp in Graphics Programming
Interface Programming Reference) is used. A subsequent GpiSetCp function
changes the code page used for this logical font.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - lMaxBaselineExt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lMaxBaselineExt (LONG)
Maximum baseline extension.
For raster fonts, this should be the height of the required font, in world
coordinates.
For outline fonts, this should be zero.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - lAveCharWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lAveCharWidth (LONG)
Average character width.
For raster fonts, this should be the width of the required font, in world
coordinates.
For outline fonts, this should be zero.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - fsType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsType (USHORT)
Type indicators.
FATTR_TYPE_KERNING Enable kerning (PostScript only).
FATTR_TYPE_MBCS Font for mixed single- and double-byte
code pages.
FATTR_TYPE_DBCS Font for double-byte code pages.
FATTR_TYPE_ANTIALIASED Antialiased font required. Only valid if
supported by the device driver.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FATTRS Field - fsFontUse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsFontUse (USHORT)
Font-use indicators.
These flags indicate how the font is to be used. They affect presentation
speed and font quality.
FATTR_FONTUSE_NOMIX
Text is not mixed with graphics and can be
written without regard to any interaction
with graphics objects.
FATTR_FONTUSE_OUTLINE
Select an outline (vector) font. The font
characters can be used as part of a path
definition. If this flag is not set, an
outline font might or might not be selected.
If an outline font is selected, however,
character widths are rounded to an integral
number of pels.
FATTR_FONTUSE_TRANSFORMABLE
Characters can be transformed (for example,
scaled, rotated, or sheared).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.25. FDATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Date data structure for file-system functions.
typedef struct _FDATE {
USHORT day:5; /* Binary day for directory entry. */
USHORT month:4; /* Binary month for directory entry. */
USHORT year:7; /* The number of years since 1980 for this directory entry. */
} FDATE;
typedef FDATE *PFDATE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FDATE Field - day:5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
day:5 (USHORT)
Binary day for directory entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FDATE Field - month:4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
month:4 (USHORT)
Binary month for directory entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FDATE Field - year:7 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
year:7 (USHORT)
The number of years since 1980 for this directory entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.26. FEA2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
FEA2 defines the format for setting the full extended attributes in the file.
typedef struct _FEA2 {
ULONG oNextEntryOffset; /* Offset to next entry. */
BYTE fEA; /* Extended attributes flag. */
BYTE cbName; /* Length of szName, not including NULL. */
USHORT cbValue; /* Value length. */
CHAR szName[1]; /* Extended attribute name. */
} FEA2;
typedef FEA2 *PFEA2;
Extended attributes (EAs) are non-critical by default. A non-critical EA is one
that is not necessary to the functionality of the application. If a
non-critical EA is lost, the system continues to operate correctly. For
example, losing the icons associated with data files does not generally cause
any ill effect other than the inability to show the icon.
A critical extended attribute is one which is necessary for the correct
operation of the operating system or of a particular operation. EAs should be
marked as critical if their loss would cause the system or program to perform
incorrectly. For example, a mail program might store mail headers in EAs. The
loss of the header from a message would normally render the mail program unable
to further use that message. This would be unacceptable, so the mail program
should mark this EA as critical.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2 Field - oNextEntryOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
oNextEntryOffset (ULONG)
Offset to next entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2 Field - fEA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fEA (BYTE)
Extended attributes flag.
FEA_NEEDEA
Extended attributes are critical.
If this flag is set, this file cannot be copied to a file system
that does not support extended attributes. This flag should only be
set if extended attributes are critical to the processing of this
file.
0
Extended attributes are not critical.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2 Field - cbName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbName (BYTE)
Length of szName, not including NULL.
This value must be greater than 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2 Field - cbValue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbValue (USHORT)
Value length.
Sending an EA with cbValue set to 0 in the FEA2 data structure causes that
attribute to be deleted, if possible. Receiving an EA with cbValue set to 0
in the FEA2 data structure indicates that the attribute is not present.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2 Field - szName[1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szName[1] (CHAR)
Extended attribute name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.27. FEA2LIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
FEA2 data structure.
typedef struct _FEA2LIST {
ULONG cbList; /* Total bytes of structure including full list. */
FEA2 list[1]; /* Variable-length FEA2 structures. */
} FEA2LIST;
typedef FEA2LIST *PFEA2LIST;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2LIST Field - cbList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbList (ULONG)
Total bytes of structure including full list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FEA2LIST Field - list[1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
list[1] (FEA2)
Variable-length FEA2 structures.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.28. FIELDINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains information about column data in the details view of
the container control. The details view displays each FIELDINFO structure as a
column of data that contains specific information about each container record.
For example, one FIELDINFO structure, or column, might contain icons or bit
maps that represent each container record. Another FIELDINFO structure might
contain the date or time that each container record was created.
typedef struct _FIELDINFO {
ULONG cb; /* Structure size. */
ULONG flData; /* Data attributes. */
ULONG flTitle; /* Column heading attributes. */
PVOID pTitleData; /* Column heading data. */
ULONG offStruct; /* Structure offset. */
PVOID pUserData; /* Pointer to user data. */
struct _FIELDINFO *pNextFieldInfo; /* Pointer to the next linked FIELDINFO data structure. */
ULONG cxWidth; /* Column width. */
} FIELDINFO;
typedef FIELDINFO *PFIELDINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Structure size.
The size (in bytes) of the FIELDINFO structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - flData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flData (ULONG)
Data attributes.
Attributes of the data in a field.
Specify one of the following for each column to choose the type of
data that is displayed in each column:
CFA_BITMAPORICON
The column contains bit-map or icon data.
CFA_DATE
The data in the column is displayed in date format. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for date format. Use the
data structure described in CDATE
CFA_STRING
Character or text data is displayed in this column.
CFA_TIME
The data in the column is displayed in time format. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for time format. Use the
data structure described in CTIME.
CFA_ULONG
Unsigned number data is displayed in this column. National
Language Support (NLS) is enabled for number format.
Specify any or all of the following column attributes:
CFA_FIREADONLY
Prevents text in a FIELDINFO data structure (text in a column)
from being edited directly. This attribute applies only to
columns for which the CFA_STRING attribute has been specified.
CFA_HORZSEPARATOR
A horizontal separator is provided beneath column headings.
CFA_INVISIBLE
Invisible container column. The default is visible.
CFA_OWNER
Ownerdraw is enabled for this container column.
CFA_SEPARATOR
A vertical separator is drawn after this column.
Specify one of the following for each column to vertically position
data in that column:
CFA_BOTTOM
Bottom-justifies field data.
CFA_TOP
Top-justifies field data.
CFA_VCENTER
Vertically centers field data. This is the default.
Specify one of the following for each column to horizontally position
data in that column. These attributes can be combined with the
attributes used for vertical positioning of column data by using an OR
operator (|).
CFA_CENTER
Horizontally centers field data.
CFA_LEFT
Left-justifies field data. This is the default.
CFA_RIGHT
Right-justifies field data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - flTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flTitle (ULONG)
Column heading attributes.
Specify the following if icon or bit-map data is to be displayed in
the column heading:
CFA_BITMAPORICON
The column heading contains icon or bit-map data. If
CFA_BITMAPORICON is not specified, any data that is assigned
to a column heading is assumed to be character or text data.
Specify the following to prevent direct editing of a column heading:
CFA_FITITLEREADONLY
Prevents a column heading from being edited directly.
Specify one of the following for each column heading to vertically
position data in that column heading:
CFA_TOP
Top-justifies column headings.
CFA_BOTTOM
Bottom-justifies column headings.
CFA_VCENTER
Vertically centers column headings. This is the default.
Specify one of the following for each column heading to horizontally
position data in that column heading. These attributes can be combined
with the attributes used for vertical positioning of column heading
data by using an OR operator (|).
CFA_CENTER
Horizontally centers column headings.
CFA_LEFT
Left-justifies column headings. This is the default.
CFA_RIGHT
Right-justifies column headings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - pTitleData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pTitleData (PVOID)
Column heading data.
Column heading data, which can be a text string or an icon or bit map. The
default is a text string. If the flTitle field is set to the
CFA_BITMAPORICON attribute, this must be an icon or bit map.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - offStruct ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
offStruct (ULONG)
Structure offset.
Offset from the beginning of a RECORDCORE structure to the data that is
displayed in this column.
Note: If the CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified when a container is
created, then MINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of RECORDCORE and
PMINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of PRECORDCORE in all applicable
data structures and messages.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - pUserData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pUserData (PVOID)
Pointer to user data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - pNextFieldInfo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNextFieldInfo (struct _FIELDINFO *)
Pointer to the next linked FIELDINFO data structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FIELDINFO Field - cxWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cxWidth (ULONG)
Column width.
Used to specify the width of a column. The default is an automatically
sized column that is always the width of its widest element. If this field
is set and the data is too wide, the data is truncated.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.29. FILEFINDBUF4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Level 2 (32-bit) information (used with EAs).
typedef struct _FILEFINDBUF4 {
ULONG oNextEntryOffset; /* Offset of next entry. */
FDATE fdateCreation; /* Date of file creation. */
FTIME ftimeCreation; /* Time of file creation. */
FDATE fdateLastAccess; /* Date of last access. */
FTIME ftimeLastAccess; /* Time of last access. */
FDATE fdateLastWrite; /* Date of last write. */
FTIME ftimeLastWrite; /* Time of last write. */
ULONG cbFile; /* Size of file. */
ULONG cbFileAlloc; /* Allocated size. */
ULONG attrFile; /* File attributes. */
ULONG cbList; /* Size of the file's extended attributes. */
UCHAR cchName; /* Length of file name. */
CHAR achName[CCHMAXPATHCOMP]; /* File name including null terminator. */
} FILEFINDBUF4;
typedef FILEFINDBUF4 *PFILEFINDBUF4;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - oNextEntryOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
oNextEntryOffset (ULONG)
Offset of next entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - fdateCreation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fdateCreation (FDATE)
Date of file creation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - ftimeCreation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ftimeCreation (FTIME)
Time of file creation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - fdateLastAccess ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fdateLastAccess (FDATE)
Date of last access.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - ftimeLastAccess ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ftimeLastAccess (FTIME)
Time of last access.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - fdateLastWrite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fdateLastWrite (FDATE)
Date of last write.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - ftimeLastWrite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ftimeLastWrite (FTIME)
Time of last write.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - cbFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbFile (ULONG)
Size of file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - cbFileAlloc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbFileAlloc (ULONG)
Allocated size.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - attrFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
attrFile (ULONG)
File attributes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - cbList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbList (ULONG)
Size of the file's extended attributes.
The size is measured in bytes and is the size of the file's entire extended
attribute set on the disk.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - cchName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cchName (UCHAR)
Length of file name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILEFINDBUF4 Field - achName[CCHMAXPATHCOMP] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
achName[CCHMAXPATHCOMP] (CHAR)
File name including null terminator.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.30. FILTERFLAGS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Filter flags structure.
typedef struct _FILTERFLAGS {
ULONG cbItem; /* Context menu id. */
ULONG Flags[3]; /* Pop-up menu flags. */
} FILTERFLAGS;
typedef FILTERFLAGS *PFILTERFLAGS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILTERFLAGS Field - cbItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbItem (ULONG)
Context menu id.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FILTERFLAGS Field - Flags[3] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Flags[3] (ULONG)
Pop-up menu flags.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.31. FIXED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Signed-integer fraction (16:16). This can be treated as a LONG where the value
has been multiplied by 65 536.
typedef LONG FIXED;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.32. FONTPOT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Fontpot structure.
typedef struct _FONTPOT {
CELL cell; /* Size of the data that follows. */
FATTRS fAttrs; /* Font-attribute structure from WinFontDlg. */
CHAR szFont[CCHFONTNAME+1]; /* The font name. */
} FONTPOT;
typedef FONTPOT *PFONTPOT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FONTPOT Field - cell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cell (CELL)
Size of the data that follows.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FONTPOT Field - fAttrs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fAttrs (FATTRS)
Font-attribute structure from WinFontDlg.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FONTPOT Field - szFont[CCHFONTNAME+1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szFont[CCHFONTNAME+1] (CHAR)
The font name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.33. FTIME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Time data structure for file-system functions.
typedef struct _FTIME {
USHORT twosecs:5; /* Binary number of two-second increments. */
USHORT minutes:6; /* Binary number of minutes. */
USHORT hours:5; /* Binary number of hours. */
} FTIME;
typedef FTIME *PFTIME;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FTIME Field - twosecs:5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
twosecs:5 (USHORT)
Binary number of two-second increments.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FTIME Field - minutes:6 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
minutes:6 (USHORT)
Binary number of minutes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> FTIME Field - hours:5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hours:5 (USHORT)
Binary number of hours.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.34. HAB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Anchor-block handle.
typedef LHANDLE HAB;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.35. HBITMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Bitmap handle.
typedef LHANDLE HBITMAP;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.36. HCINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Hardcopy-capabilities structure.
typedef struct _HCINFO {
CHAR szFormname[32]; /* Form name. */
LONG cx; /* Width (left-to-right) in millimeters. */
LONG cy; /* Height (top-to-bottom) in millimeters. */
LONG xLeftClip; /* Left clip limit in millimeters. */
LONG yBottomClip; /* Bottom clip limit in millimeters. */
LONG xRightClip; /* Right clip limit in millimeters. */
LONG yTopClip; /* Top clip limit in millimeters. */
LONG xPels; /* Number of pels between left and right clip limits. */
LONG yPels; /* Number of pels between bottom and top clip limits. */
LONG flAttributes; /* Attributes of the form identifier. */
} HCINFO;
typedef HCINFO *PHCINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - szFormname[32] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szFormname[32] (CHAR)
Form name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - cx ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cx (LONG)
Width (left-to-right) in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - cy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cy (LONG)
Height (top-to-bottom) in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - xLeftClip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xLeftClip (LONG)
Left clip limit in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - yBottomClip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yBottomClip (LONG)
Bottom clip limit in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - xRightClip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xRightClip (LONG)
Right clip limit in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - yTopClip ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yTopClip (LONG)
Top clip limit in millimeters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - xPels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xPels (LONG)
Number of pels between left and right clip limits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - yPels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yPels (LONG)
Number of pels between bottom and top clip limits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> HCINFO Field - flAttributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flAttributes (LONG)
Attributes of the form identifier.
HCAPS_SELECTABLE
The form is installed on the printer as given by
the printer properties dialog. It is available
from an alternate form source without operator
intervention. If the form does not have this bit
set and is used (if the user selects it), a "forms
mismatch" error is generated by the printer
object.
HCAPS_CURRENT
The form is the one currently selected by the
pdriv field (the job properties) in DEVOPENSTRUC
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.37. HFIND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Handle associated with a wpclsFindObjectFirst request.
typedef LHANDLE HFIND;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.38. HMODULE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Module handle.
typedef LHANDLE HMODULE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.39. HMQ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Message-queue handle.
typedef LHANDLE HMQ;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.40. HOBJECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Workplace object handle.
typedef LHANDLE HOBJECT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.41. HPOINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer handle.
typedef LHANDLE HPOINTER;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.42. HPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Presentation-space handle.
typedef LHANDLE HPS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.43. HSTR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
String handle.
typedef LHANDLE HSTR;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.44. HWND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Window handle.
typedef LHANDLE HWND;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.45. ICONINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Icon information data structure.
typedef struct _ICONINFO {
ULONG cb; /* Length of the ICONINFO structure. */
ULONG fFormat; /* Indicates where the icon resides. */
PSZ pszFileName; /* Name of the file containing icon data. */
HMODULE hmod; /* Module containing the icon resource. */
ULONG resid; /* Identity of the icon resource. */
ULONG cbIconData; /* Length of the icon data in bytes. */
PVOID pIconData; /* Pointer to the buffer containing icon data. */
} ICONINFO;
typedef ICONINFO *PICONINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Length of the ICONINFO structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - fFormat ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fFormat (ULONG)
Indicates where the icon resides.
Possible values are:
ICON_FILE
Icon file supplied.
ICON_RESOURCE
Icon resource supplied.
ICON_DATA
Icon data supplied.
ICON_CLEAR
Go back to default icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - pszFileName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszFileName (PSZ)
Name of the file containing icon data.
This value is ignored if fFormat is not equal to ICON_FILE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - hmod ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hmod (HMODULE)
Module containing the icon resource.
This value is ignored if fFormat is not equal to ICON_RESOURCE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - resid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
resid (ULONG)
Identity of the icon resource.
This value is ignored if fFormat is not equal to ICON_RESOURCE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - cbIconData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbIconData (ULONG)
Length of the icon data in bytes.
This value is ignored if fFormat is not equal to ICON_DATA.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONINFO Field - pIconData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pIconData (PVOID)
Pointer to the buffer containing icon data.
This value is ignored if fFormat is not equal to ICON_DATA.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.46. ICONPOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Icon position structure.
typedef struct _ICONPOS {
POINTL ptlIcon; /* Position of icon. */
CHAR szIdentity[1]; /* Object identity string. */
} ICONPOS;
typedef ICONPOS *PICONPOS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONPOS Field - ptlIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlIcon (POINTL)
Position of icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ICONPOS Field - szIdentity[1] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
szIdentity[1] (CHAR)
Object identity string.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.47. LHANDLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The handle of a resource.
typedef unsigned long LHANDLE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.48. LINEBUNDLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Line-attributes bundle structure.
typedef struct _LINEBUNDLE {
LONG lColor; /* Line foreground color. */
LONG lBackColor; /* Line background color. */
USHORT usMixMode; /* Line foreground-mix mode. */
USHORT usBackMixMode; /* Line background-mix mode. */
FIXED fxWidth; /* Line width. */
LONG lGeomWidth; /* Geometric line width. */
USHORT usType; /* Line type. */
USHORT usEnd; /* Line end. */
USHORT usJoin; /* Line join. */
USHORT usReserved; /* Reserved. */
} LINEBUNDLE;
typedef LINEBUNDLE *PLINEBUNDLE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - lColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lColor (LONG)
Line foreground color.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - lBackColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lBackColor (LONG)
Line background color.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usMixMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usMixMode (USHORT)
Line foreground-mix mode.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usBackMixMode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usBackMixMode (USHORT)
Line background-mix mode.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - fxWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fxWidth (FIXED)
Line width.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - lGeomWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lGeomWidth (LONG)
Geometric line width.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usType (USHORT)
Line type.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usEnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usEnd (USHORT)
Line end.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usJoin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usJoin (USHORT)
Line join.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINEBUNDLE Field - usReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usReserved (USHORT)
Reserved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.49. LINKITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
USAGE_LINK structure.
typedef struct _LINKITEM {
WPObject *LinkObj; /* The link object. */
} LINKITEM;
typedef LINKITEM *PLINKITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> LINKITEM Field - LinkObj ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
LinkObj (WPObject *)
The link object.
Points to an object of class WPObject.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.50. LONG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Signed integer in the range -2 147 483 648 through 2 147 483 647.
#define LONG long
Note: Where this data type represents a graphic coordinate in world or model
space, its value is restricted to -134 217 728 through 134 217 727.
A graphic coordinate in device or screen coordinates is restricted to -32 768
through 32 767.
The value of a graphic coordinate may be further restricted by any transforms
currently in force, including the positioning of the origin of the window on
the screen. In particular, coordinates in world or model space must not
generate coordinate values after transformation (that is, in device or screen
space) outside the range -32 768 through 32 767.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.51. MEMORYITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
USAGE_MEMORY structure.
typedef struct _MEMORYITEM {
ULONG cbBuffer; /* Number of bytes in the memory block. */
} MEMORYITEM;
typedef MEMORYITEM *PMEMORYITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MEMORYITEM Field - cbBuffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbBuffer (ULONG)
Number of bytes in the memory block.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.52. MINIRECORDCORE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains information for records smaller than those defined by
the RECORDCORE data structure. This data structure is used if the
CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified when a container is created.
typedef struct _MINIRECORDCORE {
ULONG cb; /* Structure size. */
ULONG flRecordAttr; /* Attributes of container records. */
POINTL ptlIcon; /* Record position. */
struct _MINIRECORDCORE *preccNextRecord; /* Pointer to the next linked record. */
PSZ pszIcon; /* Record text. */
HPOINTER hptrIcon; /* Record icon. */
} MINIRECORDCORE;
typedef MINIRECORDCORE *PMINIRECORDCORE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Structure size.
The size (in bytes) of the MINIRECORDCORE structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - flRecordAttr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flRecordAttr (ULONG)
Attributes of container records.
Contains any or all of the following:
CRA_COLLAPSED
Specifies that a record is collapsed.
CRA_CURSORED
Specifies that a record will be drawn with a selection cursor.
CRA_DROPONABLE
Specifies that a record can be a target for direct manipulation.
CRA_EXPANDED
Specifies that a record is expanded.
CRA_FILTERED
Specifies that a record is filtered and, therefore, hidden from
view.
CRA_INUSE
Specifies that a record will be drawn with in-use emphasis.
CRA_RECORDREADONLY
Prevents a record from being edited directly.
CRA_SELECTED
Specifies that a record will be drawn with selected-state emphasis.
CRA_TARGET
Specifies that a record will be drawn with target emphasis.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - ptlIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlIcon (POINTL)
Record position.
Position of a container record in the icon view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - preccNextRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
preccNextRecord (struct _MINIRECORDCORE *)
Pointer to the next linked record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - pszIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszIcon (PSZ)
Record text.
Text for the container record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> MINIRECORDCORE Field - hptrIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrIcon (HPOINTER)
Record icon.
Icon that is displayed for the container record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.53. MPARAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A 4-byte message-dependent parameter structure.
typedef VOID *MPARAM;
Certain elements of information, placed into the parameters of a message, have
data types that do not use all four bytes of this data type. The rules
governing these cases are:
BOOL The value is contained in the low word and the high word is 0.
SHORT The value is contained in the low word and its sign is extended into
the high word.
USHORT The value is contained in the low word and the high word is 0.
NULL The entire four bytes are 0.
The structure of this data type depends on the message. For details, see the
description of the particular message.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.54. MRESULT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A 4-byte message-dependent reply parameter structure.
typedef VOID *MRESULT;
Certain elements of information, placed into the parameters of a message, have
data types that do not use all four bytes of this data type. The rules
governing these cases are:
BOOL The value is contained in the low word and the high word is 0.
SHORT The value is contained in the low word and its sign is extended into
the high word.
USHORT The value is contained in the low word and the high word is 0.
NULL The entire four bytes are 0.
The structure of this data type depends on the message. For details, see the
description of the particular message.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.55. OBJCLASS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Object class structure.
typedef struct _OBJCLASS {
struct _OBJCLASS *pNext; /* Pointer to the next object class structure. */
PSZ pszClassName; /* Class name. */
PSZ pszModName; /* Module name. */
} OBJCLASS;
typedef OBJCLASS *POBJCLASS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJCLASS Field - pNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNext (struct _OBJCLASS *)
Pointer to the next object class structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJCLASS Field - pszClassName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszClassName (PSZ)
Class name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJCLASS Field - pszModName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszModName (PSZ)
Module name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.56. OBJDATA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Object data structure. Class-specific information is contained in this
structure.
typedef struct _OBJDATA {
WPSRCLASSBLOCK *CurrentClass; /* Pointer to the current save or restore class block. */
WPSRCLASSBLOCK *First; /* Pointer to the first save or restore class block. */
PUCHAR NextData; /* Pointer to the next block of data. */
USHORT Length; /* Length. */
} OBJDATA;
typedef OBJDATA *POBJDATA;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJDATA Field - CurrentClass ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
CurrentClass (WPSRCLASSBLOCK *)
Pointer to the current save or restore class block.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJDATA Field - First ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
First (WPSRCLASSBLOCK *)
Pointer to the first save or restore class block.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJDATA Field - NextData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
NextData (PUCHAR)
Pointer to the next block of data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OBJDATA Field - Length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Length (USHORT)
Length.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.57. OBJECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to an object of class WPObject.
typedef WPObject *OBJECT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.58. OWNERITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Owner item.
typedef struct _OWNERITEM {
HWND hwnd; /* Window handle. */
HPS hps; /* Presentation-space handle. */
ULONG fsState; /* State. */
ULONG fsAttribute; /* Attribute. */
ULONG fsStateOld; /* Old state. */
ULONG fsAttributeOld; /* Old attribute. */
RECTL rclItem; /* Item rectangle. */
LONG idItem; /* Item identity. */
ULONG hItem; /* Item. */
} OWNERITEM;
typedef OWNERITEM *POWNERITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - hwnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwnd (HWND)
Window handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - hps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hps (HPS)
Presentation-space handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - fsState ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsState (ULONG)
State.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - fsAttribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsAttribute (ULONG)
Attribute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - fsStateOld ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsStateOld (ULONG)
Old state.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - fsAttributeOld ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsAttributeOld (ULONG)
Old attribute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - rclItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
rclItem (RECTL)
Item rectangle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - idItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
idItem (LONG)
Item identity.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> OWNERITEM Field - hItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hItem (ULONG)
Item.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.59. PAGEINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Settings page information structure.
typedef struct _PAGEINFO {
ULONG cb; /* Length of PAGEINFO structure. */
HWND hwndPage; /* Handle of page. */
PFNWP pfnwp; /* Window procedure. */
ULONG resid; /* Resource identity. */
PVOID pCreateParams; /* Pointer to creation parameters. */
USHORT dlgid; /* Dialog identity. */
USHORT usPageStyleFlags; /* Notebook control-page style flags. */
USHORT usPageInsertFlags; /* Notebook control-page insertion flags. */
USHORT usSettingsFlags; /* Settings flag. */
PSZ pszName; /* Pointer to a string containing the page name. */
USHORT idDefaultHelpPanel; /* Identity of the default help panel. */
USHORT usReserved2; /* Reserved value; must be zero. */
PSZ pszHelpLibraryName; /* Pointer to the name of the help file. */
PUSHORT pHelpSubtable; /* Pointer to the help subtable. */
HMODULE hmodHelpSubtable; /* Module handle for the help subtable. */
ULONG ulPageInsertId; /* Notebook control-page identity. */
} PAGEINFO;
typedef PAGEINFO *PPAGEINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Length of PAGEINFO structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - hwndPage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndPage (HWND)
Handle of page.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - pfnwp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pfnwp (PFNWP)
Window procedure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - resid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
resid (ULONG)
Resource identity.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - pCreateParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pCreateParams (PVOID)
Pointer to creation parameters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - dlgid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
dlgid (USHORT)
Dialog identity.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - usPageStyleFlags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usPageStyleFlags (USHORT)
Notebook control-page style flags.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - usPageInsertFlags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usPageInsertFlags (USHORT)
Notebook control-page insertion flags.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - usSettingsFlags ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usSettingsFlags (USHORT)
Settings flag.
This flag must be set to one of the following values:
0
You will not get page numbers.
SETTINGS_PAGE_NUMBERS
Page numbers will automatically be put on the status line for pages
that have minor pages under the major tab page.
If you want to use the page numbers, make sure all pages have this
setting.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - pszName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszName (PSZ)
Pointer to a string containing the page name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - idDefaultHelpPanel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
idDefaultHelpPanel (USHORT)
Identity of the default help panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - usReserved2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
usReserved2 (USHORT)
Reserved value; must be zero.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - pszHelpLibraryName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszHelpLibraryName (PSZ)
Pointer to the name of the help file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - pHelpSubtable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pHelpSubtable (PUSHORT)
Pointer to the help subtable.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - hmodHelpSubtable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hmodHelpSubtable (HMODULE)
Module handle for the help subtable.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAGEINFO Field - ulPageInsertId ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulPageInsertId (ULONG)
Notebook control-page identity.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.60. PAINTPOT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PAINTPOT structure.
typedef struct _PAINTPOT {
CELL cell; /* Size of the data that follows. */
ULONG ulRGB; /* Color of this paintpot. */
} PAINTPOT;
typedef PAINTPOT *PPAINTPOT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAINTPOT Field - cell ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cell (CELL)
Size of the data that follows.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PAINTPOT Field - ulRGB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulRGB (ULONG)
Color of this paintpot.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.61. PALINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class-specific palette information data.
typedef struct _PALINFO {
ULONG xCellCount; /* Number of columns of palinfos. */
ULONG yCellCount; /* Number of rows of palinfos. */
ULONG xCursor; /* Cursor location (read only). */
ULONG yCursor; /* Cursor location (read only). */
ULONG xCellWidth; /* Width of each palinfo. */
ULONG yCellHeight; /* Height of each palinfo. */
ULONG xGap; /* X separation of palinfos. */
ULONG yGap; /* Y separation of palinfos. */
} PALINFO;
typedef PALINFO *PPALINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - xCellCount ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xCellCount (ULONG)
Number of columns of palinfos.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - yCellCount ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yCellCount (ULONG)
Number of rows of palinfos.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - xCursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xCursor (ULONG)
Cursor location (read only).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - yCursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yCursor (ULONG)
Cursor location (read only).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - xCellWidth ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xCellWidth (ULONG)
Width of each palinfo.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - yCellHeight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yCellHeight (ULONG)
Height of each palinfo.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - xGap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xGap (ULONG)
X separation of palinfos.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PALINFO Field - yGap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yGap (ULONG)
Y separation of palinfos.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.62. PCSZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to a constant null-terminated string.
typedef const char *PCSZ;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.63. PDEVOPENDATA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Open device-data array.
This data type points to data whose format is described by the DEVOPENSTRUC
data type.
typedef PSZ *PDEVOPENDATA;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.64. PFNCOMPARE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to a Details View comparison function.
This function would be used if you wanted to sort on a non-standard data type
or if you wanted to a custom sort.
typedef FNCOMPARE *PFNCOMPARE;
In the header file, this is a two-part definition as shown below:
typedef LONG (EXPENTRY FNCOMPARE)(PVOID, PVOID);
typedef FNCOMPARE *PFNCOMPARE;
The first argument (PVOID) is a pointer to the Details View field value. The
second argument (PVOID) is a pointer to the value it is to be compared with.
The function returns a LONG value that must be one of the following:
CMP_EQUAL 0
CMP_GREATER 1
CMP_LESS 2
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.65. PFNOWNDRW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to an owner-draw function for a Details View field.
This function would be used if you wanted to draw the contents of the Details
View field yourself, for example, as a graphic image or to use custom
formatting.
This function is called each time the field is painted.
typedef FNOWNDRW *PFNOWNDRW;
The first argument (HWND) is the handle of the Details View field-window being
painted. The second argument (PVOID) is a pointer to an OWNERITEM data
structure. The third argument (PVOID) is a pointer to the Comparison value to
draw (this argument is NULL except when this function is painting its value
into the Include Criteria Dialog (in the Settings notebook), in which case it
points to a string containing a comparision value. The function returns a BOOL
value of TRUE if the field was owner-drawn or FALSE if the container control
should do default painting.
In the header file, this is a two-part definition as shown below:
typedef BOOL (EXPENTRY FNOWNDRW)(HWND, PVOID, PVOID);
typedef FNOWNDRW *PFNOWNDRW;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.66. PFNWP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to a window procedure.
This is the standard function definition for window procedures.
typedef FNWP *PFNWP;
The first argument (HWND) is the handle of the window receiving the message.
The second argument (ULONG) is a message identifier. The third argument
(MPARAM) is the first message parameter (mp1). The fourth argument (MPARAM) is
the second message parameter (mp2). The function returns an MRESULT. Each
message has a specific set of possible return codes. The window procedure must
return a value that is appropriate for the message being processed.
In the header file, this is a two-part definition as shown below:
typedef MRESULT (EXPENTRY FNWP)(HWND, ULONG, MPARAM, MPARAM);
typedef FNWP *PFNWP;
Window procedures must be EXPORTED in the definitions file used by the linker.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.67. POINTL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Point structure (long integers).
typedef struct _POINTL {
LONG x; /* X-coordinate. */
LONG y; /* Y-coordinate. */
} POINTL;
typedef POINTL *PPOINTL;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> POINTL Field - x ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
x (LONG)
X-coordinate.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> POINTL Field - y ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
y (LONG)
Y-coordinate.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.68. PRINTDEST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
PRINTDEST data structure.
Contains all the parameters required to issue DevPostDeviceModes and DevOpenDC
function calls.
typedef struct _PRINTDEST {
ULONG cb; /* Length of data structure, in bytes. */
LONG lType; /* Type of device context. */
PSZ pszToken; /* Device-information token. */
LONG lCount; /* Number of items. */
PDEVOPENDATA pdopData; /* Open device context data area. */
ULONG fl; /* Flags. */
PSZ pszPrinter; /* Name of the printer. */
} PRINTDEST;
typedef PRINTDEST *PPRINTDEST;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Length of data structure, in bytes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - lType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lType (LONG)
Type of device context.
OD_QUEUED
The device context is queued.
OD_DIRECT
The device context is direct.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - pszToken ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszToken (PSZ)
Device-information token.
This is always "*".
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - lCount ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
lCount (LONG)
Number of items.
This is the number of items present in the pdopData field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - pdopData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pdopData (PDEVOPENDATA)
Open device context data area.
See DEVOPENSTRUC for information on the format of pdopData.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - fl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fl (ULONG)
Flags.
PD_JOB_PROPERTY
This flag indicates that DevPostDeviceModes should be called with
DPDM_POSTJOBPROP before calling DevOpenDC.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRINTDEST Field - pszPrinter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPrinter (PSZ)
Name of the printer.
A name that specifies the device; for example, "PRINTER1". The name is used
for calling DevPostDeviceModes.
The printer device name can be found by calling SplQueryQueue and passing
to it the information found in the pszLogAddress field of the DEVOPENSTRUC
structure pointed to by pdopData. SplQueryQueue returns a PRQINFO3
structure. The pszPrinters field in PRQINFO3 contains the printer device
name to be used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.69. PROGCATEGORY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Program category.
typedef ULONG PROGCATEGORY;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.70. PROGDETAILS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Program-details structure.
typedef struct _PROGDETAILS {
ULONG Length; /* Length of structure. */
PROGTYPE progt; /* Program type. */
PSZ pszTitle; /* Title. */
PSZ pszExecutable; /* Executable file name (program name). */
PSZ pszParameters; /* Parameter string. */
PSZ pszStartupDir; /* Start-up directory. */
PSZ pszIcon; /* Icon-file name. */
PSZ pszEnvironment; /* Environment string. */
SWP swpInitial; /* Initial window position and size. */
} PROGDETAILS;
typedef PROGDETAILS *PPROGDETAILS;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - Length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Length (ULONG)
Length of structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - progt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
progt (PROGTYPE)
Program type.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszTitle (PSZ)
Title.
If pszTitle is NULL, pszExecutable is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszExecutable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszExecutable (PSZ)
Executable file name (program name).
If pszExecutable is NULL, the file specified in the OS2_SHELL statement in
the configuration file (CONFIG.SYS) is used. If the OS2_SHELL statement
does not exist, the command processor (CMD.EXE for a non-DOS session, or
COMMAND.COM for a DOS session) is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszParameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszParameters (PSZ)
Parameter string.
The pszParameters can be set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszStartupDir ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszStartupDir (PSZ)
Start-up directory.
The pszStartupDir can be set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszIcon (PSZ)
Icon-file name.
If pszIcon is NULL, the default icon for the executable is used.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - pszEnvironment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszEnvironment (PSZ)
Environment string.
A list of null-terminated strings ending with an extra NULL character.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGDETAILS Field - swpInitial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
swpInitial (SWP)
Initial window position and size.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.71. PROGTYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Program-type structure.
typedef struct _PROGTYPE {
PROGCATEGORY progc; /* Program category: */
ULONG fbVisible; /* Visibility attribute. */
} PROGTYPE;
typedef PROGTYPE *PPROGTYPE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGTYPE Field - progc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
progc (PROGCATEGORY)
Program category:
PROG_DEFAULT
Default application.
PROG_PM
Presentation Manager application.
PROG_WINDOWABLEVIO
Text-windowed application.
PROG_FULLSCREEN
Full-screen application.
PROG_WINDOWEDVDM
PC DOS executable process (windowed).
PROG_VDM
PC DOS executable process (full screen).
PROG_REAL
PC DOS executable process (full screen). Same as PROG_VDM.
PROG_31_STDSEAMLESSVDM
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in its own windowed WINOS2
session.
PROG_31_STDSEAMLESSCOMMON
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in a common windowed WINOS2
session.
PROG_31_ENHSEAMLESSVDM
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in enhanced compatibility
mode in its own windowed WINOS2 session.
PROG_31_ENHSEAMLESSCOMMON
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in enhanced compatibility
mode in a common windowed WINOS2 session.
PROG_31_ENH
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in enhanced compatibility
mode in a full-screen WINOS2 session.
PROG_31_STD
Windows 3.1 program that will execute in a full-screen WINOS2
session.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PROGTYPE Field - fbVisible ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fbVisible (ULONG)
Visibility attribute.
When testing this field, allow for the possibility that other bits may be
defined in the future. SHE_INVISIBLE and SHE_PROTECTED can be used to mask
the visibility and protected flags, respectively.
SHE_VISIBLE
Visible
SHE_INVISIBLE
Invisible
SHE_UNPROTECTED
Unprotected
SHE_PROTECTED
Protected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.72. PRQINFO3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Print-queue information structure.
This structure is used at information levels 3 and 4.
typedef struct _PRQINFO3 {
PSZ pszName; /* Queue name. */
USHORT uPriority; /* Queue priority. */
USHORT uStartTime; /* Minutes after midnight when queue becomes active. */
USHORT uUntilTime; /* Minutes after midnight. when queue ceases to be active. */
USHORT fsType; /* Queue type. */
PSZ pszSepFile; /* Separator-page file. */
PSZ pszPrProc; /* Default queue-processor. */
PSZ pszParms; /* Queue parameters. */
PSZ pszComment; /* Queue description. */
USHORT fsStatus; /* Queue status. */
USHORT cJobs; /* Number of jobs in queue. */
PSZ pszPrinters; /* Print devices connected to queue. */
PSZ pszDriverName; /* Default device driver. */
PDRIVDATA pDriverData; /* Default queue job properties. */
} PRQINFO3;
typedef PRQINFO3 *PPRQINFO3;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszName (PSZ)
Queue name.
The maximum length of the name in the network case is 256 (including one
byte for zero termination).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - uPriority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
uPriority (USHORT)
Queue priority.
The range is 1 through 9, with 1 being the highest queue priority.
The default job priority (DefJobPrio) is determined from:
DefJobPrio=100-(10* uPriority).
If a job is added with PRJ_NO_PRIORITY specified, DefJobPrio is used. If a
default priority higher than the default job priority is specified, the
default job priority is used. If a default priority lower than the default
is specified, the specified job priority is used.
PRQ_DEF_PRIORITY
Default priority
PRQ_MAX_PRIORITY
Highest priority
PRQ_MIN_PRIORITY
Minimum priority
PRQ_NO_PRIORITY
No priority.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - uStartTime ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
uStartTime (USHORT)
Minutes after midnight when queue becomes active.
For example, the value 75 represents 1:15 a.m.
If uStartTime and uUntilTime are both 0, the print queue is always
available.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - uUntilTime ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
uUntilTime (USHORT)
Minutes after midnight. when queue ceases to be active.
For example, the value 1200 represents 8 p.m.
If uUntilTime and uStartTime are both 0, the print queue is always
available.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - fsType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsType (USHORT)
Queue type.
PRQ3_TYPE_RAW
Data is always enqueued in the device specific format.
PRQ3_TYPE_BYPASS
Allows the spooler to bypass the queue processor and send data
directly to the Printer Driver. Setting this bit allows the spooler
to print jobs of type PM_Q_RAW while they are still being spooled.
PRQ3_TYPE_APPDEFAULT
This bit is set for the application default queue only.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszSepFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszSepFile (PSZ)
Separator-page file.
The path and file name of a separator-page file on the target computer.
This file contains formatting information for the page or pages to be used
between print jobs. A relative path name is taken as relative to the
current spool directory. A NULL string indicates no separator page.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszPrProc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPrProc (PSZ)
Default queue-processor.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszParms ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszParms (PSZ)
Queue parameters.
This can be any text string or a NULL string.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszComment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszComment (PSZ)
Queue description.
A NULL string results in no comment. The maximum length is 48 characters
(including one byte for the null terminator).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - fsStatus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fsStatus (USHORT)
Queue status.
PRQ3_PAUSED
Queue is paused (held).
PRQ3_PENDING
Queue is pending deletion.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - cJobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cJobs (USHORT)
Number of jobs in queue.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszPrinters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszPrinters (PSZ)
Print devices connected to queue.
This cannot be NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pszDriverName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszDriverName (PSZ)
Default device driver.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> PRQINFO3 Field - pDriverData ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pDriverData (PDRIVDATA)
Default queue job properties.
Note: An application can use pszDriverName, pDriverData, pszPrProc, and
pszParms to construct a valid DevOpenDC call based only on the queue
name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.73. PSZ ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to a null-terminated string.
If you are using C++ **, you may need to use PCSZ.
typedef unsigned char *PSZ;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.74. PVOID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pointer to a data type of undefined format.
typedef VOID *PVOID;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.75. RECORDCORE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains information for records in a container control. This
data structure is used if the CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is not specified
when a container is created.
typedef struct _RECORDCORE {
ULONG cb; /* The size, in bytes, of the RECORDCORE structure. */
ULONG flRecordAttr; /* Container record attributes. */
POINTL ptlIcon; /* Position of a container record in the icon view. */
struct _RECORDCORE *preccNextRecord; /* Pointer to the next linked record. */
PSZ pszIcon; /* Text for the icon view (CV_ICON). */
HPOINTER hptrIcon; /* Icon that is displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is not specified. */
HPOINTER hptrMiniIcon; /* Icon that is displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is specified. */
HBITMAP hbmBitmap; /* Bit map displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is not specified. */
HBITMAP hbmMiniBitmap; /* Bit map displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is specified. */
PTREEITEMDESC pTreeItemDesc; /* Pointer to a TREEITEMDESC structure. */
PSZ pszText; /* Text for the text view (CV_TEXT). */
PSZ pszName; /* Text for the name view (CV_NAME). */
PSZ pszTree; /* Text for the tree view (CV_TREE). */
} RECORDCORE;
typedef RECORDCORE *PRECORDCORE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
The size, in bytes, of the RECORDCORE structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - flRecordAttr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
flRecordAttr (ULONG)
Container record attributes.
This parameter can contain any or all of the following:
CRA_COLLAPSED
Specifies that a record is collapsed.
CRA_CURSORED
Specifies that a record will be drawn with a selection cursor.
CRA_DISABLED
Specifies that a record will be drawn with unavailable-state
emphasis.
CRA_DROPONABLE
Specifies that a record can be a target for direct manipulation.
CRA_EXPANDED
Specifies that a record is expanded.
CRA_FILTERED
Specifies that a record is filtered and, therefore, hidden from
view.
CRA_INUSE
Specifies that a record will be drawn with in-use emphasis.
CRA_PICKED
Specifies that the container record willl be picked up as part of
the drag set.
CRA_SELECTED
Specifies that a record will be drawn with selected-state emphasis.
CRA_SOURCE
Specifies that a record will be drawn with source-menu emphasis.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - ptlIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ptlIcon (POINTL)
Position of a container record in the icon view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - preccNextRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
preccNextRecord (struct _RECORDCORE *)
Pointer to the next linked record.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - pszIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszIcon (PSZ)
Text for the icon view (CV_ICON).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - hptrIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrIcon (HPOINTER)
Icon that is displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is not specified.
This field is used when the CA_DRAWICON container attribute of the CNRINFO
data structure is set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - hptrMiniIcon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrMiniIcon (HPOINTER)
Icon that is displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is specified.
This field is used when the CA_DRAWICON container attribute of the CNRINFO
data structure is set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - hbmBitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmBitmap (HBITMAP)
Bit map displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is not specified.
This field is used when the CA_DRAWBITMAP container attribute of the
CNRINFO data structure is set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - hbmMiniBitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmMiniBitmap (HBITMAP)
Bit map displayed when the CV_MINI style bit is specified.
This field is used when the CA_DRAWBITMAP container attribute of the
CNRINFO data structure is set.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - pTreeItemDesc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pTreeItemDesc (PTREEITEMDESC)
Pointer to a TREEITEMDESC structure.
The TREEITEMDESC structure contains the icons and bit maps used to
represent the state of an expanded or collapsed parent item in the tree
name view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - pszText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszText (PSZ)
Text for the text view (CV_TEXT).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - pszName ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszName (PSZ)
Text for the name view (CV_NAME).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDCORE Field - pszTree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszTree (PSZ)
Text for the tree view (CV_TREE).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.76. RECORDINSERT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains information about RECORDCORE structures that are being
inserted into a container. The RECORDINSERT structure is used in the
CM_INSERTRECORD container message only.
Note: If the CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified when a container is
created, then MINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of RECORDCORE and
PMINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of PRECORDCORE in all applicable
data structures and messages.
typedef struct _RECORDINSERT {
ULONG cb; /* Structure size. */
PRECORDCORE pRecordOrder; /* Record order. */
PRECORDCORE pRecordParent; /* Pointer to record parent. */
ULONG fInvalidateRecord; /* Update flag. */
ULONG zOrder; /* Record z-order. */
ULONG cRecordsInsert; /* Number of root-level structures. */
} RECORDINSERT;
typedef RECORDINSERT *PRECORDINSERT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - cb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cb (ULONG)
Structure size.
The size (in bytes) of the RECORDINSERT structure.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - pRecordOrder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pRecordOrder (PRECORDCORE)
Record order.
Orders the RECORDCORE structures relative to other RECORDCORE structures in
the container. The values can be:
CMA_FIRST
Places a RECORDCORE structure, or list of RECORDCORE structures, at
the beginning of the list of structures.
CMA_END
Places a RECORDCORE structure, or list of RECORDCORE structures, at
the end of the list of structures.
Other
Pointer to a RECORDCORE structure after which this structure, or
list of structures, is to be inserted.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - pRecordParent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pRecordParent (PRECORDCORE)
Pointer to record parent.
Pointer to a RECORDCORE structure that is the parent of the records to be
inserted. This field is used only with the CMA_FIRST or CMA_END attributes
of the pRecordOrder field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - fInvalidateRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fInvalidateRecord (ULONG)
Update flag.
Flag that indicates an automatic display update after RECORDCORE structures
are inserted.
TRUE
The display is automatically updated after a RECORDCORE structure
is inserted.
FALSE
The application must send the CM_INVALIDATERECORD message after a
RECORDCORE structure is inserted.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - zOrder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
zOrder (ULONG)
Record z-order.
Positions the RECORDCORE structure in z-order, relative to other records in
the container. The values can be:
CMA_TOP
Places a RECORDCORE structure at the top of the z-order. This is
the default value.
CMA_BOTTOM
Places a RECORDCORE structure at the bottom of the z-order.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDINSERT Field - cRecordsInsert ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cRecordsInsert (ULONG)
Number of root-level structures.
The number of root-level RECORDCORE structures to be inserted. The
cRecordsInsert field value must be greater than 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.77. RECORDITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
USAGE_RECORD structure.
typedef struct _RECORDITEM {
HWND hwndCnr; /* Container into which the object is inserted. */
PMINIRECORDCORE pRecord; /* Record pointer within the container. */
ULONG ulUser; /* For application use. */
} RECORDITEM;
typedef RECORDITEM *PRECORDITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDITEM Field - hwndCnr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndCnr (HWND)
Container into which the object is inserted.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDITEM Field - pRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pRecord (PMINIRECORDCORE)
Record pointer within the container.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECORDITEM Field - ulUser ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulUser (ULONG)
For application use.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.78. RECTL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Rectangle structure.
typedef struct _RECTL {
LONG xLeft; /* X-coordinate of left-hand edge of rectangle. */
LONG yBottom; /* Y-coordinate of bottom edge of rectangle. */
LONG xRight; /* X-coordinate of right-hand edge of rectangle. */
LONG yTop; /* Y-coordinate of top edge of rectangle. */
} RECTL;
typedef RECTL *PRECTL;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECTL Field - xLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xLeft (LONG)
X-coordinate of left-hand edge of rectangle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECTL Field - yBottom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yBottom (LONG)
Y-coordinate of bottom edge of rectangle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECTL Field - xRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xRight (LONG)
X-coordinate of right-hand edge of rectangle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> RECTL Field - yTop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yTop (LONG)
Y-coordinate of top edge of rectangle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.79. SEARCH_INFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Search information structure.
typedef struct _SEARCH_INFO {
M_WPObject *ClassToBeFound; /* Pointer to the object to be found. */
BOOL fSkipExtendedSearchCriteria; /* Flag to skip extended search criteria. */
PVOID pvoidExtendedCriteria; /* Pointer to extended criteria. */
} SEARCH_INFO;
typedef SEARCH_INFO *PSRCH_INFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SEARCH_INFO Field - ClassToBeFound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ClassToBeFound (M_WPObject *)
Pointer to the object to be found.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SEARCH_INFO Field - fSkipExtendedSearchCriteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fSkipExtendedSearchCriteria (BOOL)
Flag to skip extended search criteria.
TRUE Skip extended search criteria.
FALSE Don't skip extended search criteria.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SEARCH_INFO Field - pvoidExtendedCriteria ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pvoidExtendedCriteria (PVOID)
Pointer to extended criteria.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.80. SGID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This data type is specific to versions, higher than version 3, of the OS/2
operating system.
Value used to hold a screen group ID.
#ifdef _PPC_
typedef ULONG SGID;
#else
typedef USHORT SGID;
#endif
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.81. SHORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Signed integer in the range -32 768 through 32 767.
#define SHORT short
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.82. SIZEF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Size structure (FIXED values).
typedef struct _SIZEF {
FIXED cx; /* Width. */
FIXED cy; /* Height. */
} SIZEF;
typedef SIZEF *PSIZEF;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SIZEF Field - cx ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cx (FIXED)
Width.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SIZEF Field - cy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cy (FIXED)
Height.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.83. SIZEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Size structure (LONG values).
typedef struct _SIZEL {
LONG cx; /* Width. */
LONG cy; /* Height. */
} SIZEL;
typedef SIZEL *PSIZEL;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SIZEL Field - cx ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cx (LONG)
Width.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SIZEL Field - cy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cy (LONG)
Height.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.84. SORTFASTINFO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Sort record data structure.
typedef struct _SORTFASTINFO {
PFNCOMPARE pfnCompare; /* Pointer to the details view comparison function. */
ULONG FieldOffset;
M_WPObject *Class;
} SORTFASTINFO;
typedef SORTFASTINFO *PSORTFASTINFO;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SORTFASTINFO Field - pfnCompare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pfnCompare (PFNCOMPARE)
Pointer to the details view comparison function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SORTFASTINFO Field - FieldOffset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
FieldOffset (ULONG)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SORTFASTINFO Field - Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Class (M_WPObject *)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.85. SWP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Set-window-position structure.
typedef struct _SWP {
ULONG fl; /* Options. */
LONG cy; /* Window height. */
LONG cx; /* Window width. */
LONG y; /* Y-coordinate of origin. */
LONG x; /* X-coordinate of origin. */
HWND hwndInsertBehind; /* Window behind which this window is placed. */
HWND hwnd; /* Window handle. */
ULONG ulReserved1; /* Reserved value; must be 0. */
ULONG ulReserved2; /* Reserved value; must be 0. */
} SWP;
typedef SWP *PSWP;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - fl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fl (ULONG)
Options.
Possible values are shown in the following list:
SWP_ACTIVATE
SWP_DEACTIVATE
SWP_HIDE
SWP_MAXIMIZE
SWP_MINIMIZE
SWP_MOVE
SWP_NOADJUST
SWP_NOERASEWINDOW
SWP_NOREDRAW
SWP_RESTORE
SWP_SHOW
SWP_SIZE
SWP_ZORDER
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - cy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cy (LONG)
Window height.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - cx ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cx (LONG)
Window width.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - y ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
y (LONG)
Y-coordinate of origin.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - x ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
x (LONG)
X-coordinate of origin.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - hwndInsertBehind ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndInsertBehind (HWND)
Window behind which this window is placed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - hwnd ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwnd (HWND)
Window handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - ulReserved1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved1 (ULONG)
Reserved value; must be 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> SWP Field - ulReserved2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulReserved2 (ULONG)
Reserved value; must be 0.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.86. TASKREC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Task information structure.
typedef struct _TASKREC {
struct _TASKREC *next; /* Pointer to the next record in the list of current tasks. */
ULONG useCount; /* Usage count (this structure can be referenced by multiple objects). */
PVOID pStdDlg; /* Pointer to a standard Workplace Shell task dialog. */
WPFolder *folder; /* Pointer to the intended folder for the object. */
LONG xOrigin; /* Intended x-coordinate position for the object. */
LONG yOrigin; /* Intended y-coordinate position for the object. */
PSZ pszTitle; /* Intended name for the object. */
ULONG cbTitle; /* Length of the name buffer for pszTitle. */
PMINIRECORDCORE positionAfterRecord; /* Intended sort position for the object. */
BOOL fKeepAssociations;
PVOID pReserved; /* Reserved. Set to NULL. */
} TASKREC;
typedef TASKREC *PTASKREC;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - next ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
next (struct _TASKREC *)
Pointer to the next record in the list of current tasks.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - useCount ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
useCount (ULONG)
Usage count (this structure can be referenced by multiple objects).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - pStdDlg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pStdDlg (PVOID)
Pointer to a standard Workplace Shell task dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - folder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
folder (WPFolder *)
Pointer to the intended folder for the object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - xOrigin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
xOrigin (LONG)
Intended x-coordinate position for the object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - yOrigin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
yOrigin (LONG)
Intended y-coordinate position for the object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - pszTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pszTitle (PSZ)
Intended name for the object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - cbTitle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cbTitle (ULONG)
Length of the name buffer for pszTitle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - positionAfterRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
positionAfterRecord (PMINIRECORDCORE)
Intended sort position for the object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - fKeepAssociations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
fKeepAssociations (BOOL)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TASKREC Field - pReserved ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pReserved (PVOID)
Reserved. Set to NULL.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.87. TREEITEMDESC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Structure that contains icons and bit maps used to represent the state of an
expanded or collapsed parent item in the tree name view of a container control.
typedef struct _TREEITEMDESC {
HBITMAP hbmExpanded; /* Expanded bit-map handle. */
HBITMAP hbmCollapsed; /* Collapsed bit-map handle. */
HPOINTER hptrExpanded; /* Expanded icon handle. */
HPOINTER hptrCollapsed; /* Collapsed icon handle. */
} TREEITEMDESC;
typedef TREEITEMDESC *PTREEITEMDESC;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TREEITEMDESC Field - hbmExpanded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmExpanded (HBITMAP)
Expanded bit-map handle.
The handle of the bit map to be used to represent an expanded parent item
in the tree name view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TREEITEMDESC Field - hbmCollapsed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hbmCollapsed (HBITMAP)
Collapsed bit-map handle.
The handle of the bit map to be used to represent a collapsed parent item
in the tree name view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TREEITEMDESC Field - hptrExpanded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrExpanded (HPOINTER)
Expanded icon handle.
The handle of the icon to be used to represent an expanded parent item in
the tree name view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> TREEITEMDESC Field - hptrCollapsed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hptrCollapsed (HPOINTER)
Collapsed icon handle.
The handle of the icon to be used to represent a collapsed parent item in
the tree name view.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.88. UCHAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Single-byte unsigned character or unsigned integer in the range 0 through 255.
typedef unsigned char UCHAR;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.89. ULONG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
32-bit unsigned integer in the range 0 through 4 294 967 295.
typedef unsigned long ULONG;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.90. USEITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use-item data structure.
The USEITEM structure is always followed by a type-specific structure that is
indicated by the type field.
typedef struct _USEITEM {
ULONG type; /* The type of this item. */
struct _USEITEM *pNext; /* Next item in the Use list. */
} USEITEM;
typedef USEITEM *PUSEITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> USEITEM Field - type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
type (ULONG)
The type of this item.
Possible values are:
USAGE_LINK
LINKITEM
USAGE_MEMORY
MEMORYITEM
USAGE_NOTIFY
LINKITEM
USAGE_OPENVIEW
VIEWITEM
USAGE_OPENFILE
VIEWFILE
USAGE_RECORD
RECORDITEM
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> USEITEM Field - pNext ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pNext (struct _USEITEM *)
Next item in the Use list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.91. USHORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Unsigned integer in the range 0 through 65 535.
typedef unsigned short USHORT;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.92. VIEWFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
USAGE_OPENFILE structure.
typedef struct _VIEWFILE {
ULONG ulMenuId; /* Menu ID, if an association or menu page. */
LHANDLE handle; /* Open handle. */
HWND hwndCnr; /* System use only (window animation). */
PMINIRECORDCORE pRecord; /* System use only (window animation). */
} VIEWFILE;
typedef VIEWFILE *PVIEWFILE;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWFILE Field - ulMenuId ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulMenuId (ULONG)
Menu ID, if an association or menu page.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWFILE Field - handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
handle (LHANDLE)
Open handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWFILE Field - hwndCnr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndCnr (HWND)
System use only (window animation).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWFILE Field - pRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pRecord (PMINIRECORDCORE)
System use only (window animation).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.93. VIEWITEM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
USAGE_OPENVIEW structure.
typedef struct _VIEWITEM {
ULONG view; /* Object view that this represents. */
LHANDLE handle; /* Open handle. */
ULONG ulViewState; /* View state flags. */
HWND hwndCnr; /* System use only (window animation). */
PMINIRECORDCORE pRecord; /* System use only (window animation). */
} VIEWITEM;
typedef VIEWITEM *PVIEWITEM;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWITEM Field - view ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
view (ULONG)
Object view that this represents.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWITEM Field - handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
handle (LHANDLE)
Open handle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWITEM Field - ulViewState ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ulViewState (ULONG)
View state flags.
Possible values are:
VIEWSTATE_CLOSING
The view is closing.
VIEWSTATE_DELETING
The object is being deleted.
VIEWSTATE_OBJECTDELETED
The object has been deleted.
VIEWSTATE_OPENING
The view is being opened.
VIEWSTATE_PAINTED
The view was painted.
VIEWSTATE_POPULATING
The view is populating.
VIEWSTATE_USERHIDDEN
The view was hidden by the user.
VIEWSTATE_USERMINIMIZED
The view was minimized by the user.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWITEM Field - hwndCnr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
hwndCnr (HWND)
System use only (window animation).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> VIEWITEM Field - pRecord ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
pRecord (PMINIRECORDCORE)
System use only (window animation).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.94. VOID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A data area of undefined format.
#define VOID void
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.95. WPSRCLASSBLOCK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Save or restore the class block structure.
typedef struct _WPSRCLASSBLOCK {
SHORT ClassNameLength; /* Length of class name. */
USHORT IVarLength; /* Length of the instance variable information. */
} WPSRCLASSBLOCK;
typedef WPSRCLASSBLOCK *PWPSRCLASSBLOCK*;
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WPSRCLASSBLOCK Field - ClassNameLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
ClassNameLength (SHORT)
Length of class name.
Includes the null terminator. This must be a short and must be at the
beginning of the structure. The class name immediately follows the control
block. The first instance variable control block immediately follows this.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> WPSRCLASSBLOCK Field - IVarLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
IVarLength (USHORT)
Length of the instance variable information.
Includes the two-byte null terminator.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Menu IDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following Menu IDs are for popup menus.
WPMENUID_ACCESSNEW
WPMENUID_ARRANGE
WPMENUID_ASSIGN
WPMENUID_CHKDSK
WPMENUID_CLOSE
WPMENUID_COPY
WPMENUID_COPYDSK
WPMENUID_CREATEANOTHER
WPMENUID_CREATESHADOW
WPMENUID_DELETE
WPMENUID_DESELALL
WPMENUID_DETAILS
WPMENUID_EJECTDISK
WPMENUID_EXTENDEDHELP
WPMENUID_FIND
WPMENUID_FIXDSK
WPMENUID_FORMAT
WPMENUID_HELP
WPMENUID_HELP_FOR_HELP
WPMENUID_HELPINDEX
WPMENUID_HELPKEYS
WPMENUID_HOWTOGETHELP
WPMENUID_ICON
WPMENUID_LOCKDISK
WPMENUID_LOCKUP
WPMENUID_LOGIN
WPMENUID_LOGOUT
WPMENUID_MOVE
WPMENUID_OPEN
WPMENUID_OPENPARENT
WPMENUID_PALETTE
WPMENUID_PICKUP
WPMENUID_PRIMARY
WPMENUID_PRINT
WPMENUID_PROGRAM
WPMENUID_PROPERTIES
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_CANCEL
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_COPY
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_CREATE
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_CREATEPROGRAMOBJECT
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_LINK
WPMENUID_PUTDOWN_MOVE
WPMENUID_REFRESH
WPMENUID_SELECT
WPMENUID_SELALL
WPMENUID_SHUTDOWN
WPMENUID_SORT
WPMENUID_SYSTEMSETUP
WPMENUID_TREE
WPMENUID_UNASSIGN
WPMENUID_UNLOCKDISK
The following menu IDs are for the WPFolder menu bar.
WPMENUID_ARRANGEBOTTOM
WPMENUID_ARRANGELEFT
WPMENUID_ARRANGERIGHT
WPMENUID_ARRANGETOP
WPMENUID_CHANGETODETAILS
WPMENUID_CHANGETOICON
WPMENUID_CHANGETOTREE
WPMENUID_DOCSHELL
WPMENUID_EDITPULLDOWN
WPMENUID_FOLDERPULLDOWN
WPMENUID_HELPPULLDOWN
WPMENUID_LOCKEDINPLACE
WPMENUID_LOCKEDINPLACENO
WPMENUID_LOCKEDINPLACEYES
WPMENUID_LOGOFF
WPMENUID_MAXIMIZE
WPMENUID_PASTE
WPMENUID_PERIMETER
WPMENUID_RESTORE
WPMENUID_SELECTEDHORZ
WPMENUID_SELECTEDPULLDOWN
WPMENUID_SELECTEDVERT
WPMENUID_STANDARD
WPMENUID_UNDOARRANGE
WPMENUID_VIEW
WPMENUID_VIEWPULLDOWN
WPMENUID_WINDOWLIST
The following menu IDs are for the WPPort context menu.
WPPOIDM_PORT_INSTALL
WPPOIDM_PORT_REDIRECT
The following menu IDs are for the WPPrinter context menu.
WPPOIDM_PD_DEFAULT
WPPOIDM_PD_DELETE_JOBS
WPPOIDM_PD_DETAIL
WPPOIDM_PD_HOLD
WPPOIDM_PD_ICON
WPPOIDM_PD_INSTALL
WPPOICM_PD_MENU
WPPOICM_PD_OPENMENU
WPPOIDM_PD_RELEASE
WPPOIDM_PD_REFRESH
WPPOIDM_PD_STATUS
The following menu IDs are for the WPQdr context menu.
WPPOIDM_QDR_INSTALL
The following menu IDs are for the WPRPRinter context menu.
WPPOICM_RPRTMENU
WPPOIDM_RPRTACCESSANOTHER
WPPOIDM_RPRTCONNECT
WPPOIDM_RPRTDISCONNECT
WPPOIDM_RPRTLOGON
WPPOIDM_RPRTLOGOFF
WPPOIDM_RPRTREMADMIN
WPPOIDM_RPRTREMADMIN_COPY
WPPOIDM_RPRTREMADMIN_CREATE
WPPOIDM_RPRTREMADMIN_DELETE
WPPOIDM_PPRTINSTALL
The following menu IDs are for the WPSpool context menu.
WPPOICM_SPOOL_ENABLE 5001
WPPOIDM_SPOOL_ENABLE 5101
WPPOICM_SPOOL_DISABLE 5002
WPPOIDM_SPOOL_DISABLE 5102
All user-defined menu IDs should be greater than WPMENUID_USER.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
(November 1996)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states
do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time.
It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are
not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be
construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming,
or services in your country.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your
IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Copyright Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This publication contains printed sample application
programs in source language, which illustrate OS/2 programming techniques. You
may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without
payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or
distributing application programs conforming to the OS/2 application
programming interface.
Each copy of any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work, which
is distributed to others, must include a copyright notice as follows: "(C)
(your company name) (year). All rights reserved."
(C) Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1994, 1996. All
rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights -
Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Disclaimers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended
to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used.
Subject to IBM's valid intellectual property or other legally protectable
rights, any functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be used
instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The evaluation and
verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those
expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
500 Columbus Avenue
Thornwood, NY 10594
U.S.A.
Asia-Pacific users can inquire, in writing, to the IBM Director of
Intellectual Property and Licensing, IBM World Trade Asia Corporation, 2-31
Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106, Japan.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the
purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently
created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual
use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact IBM
Corporation, Department LZKS, 11400 Burnet Road, Austin, TX 78758 U.S.A. Such
information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Trademarks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States
or other countries or both:
AIX Common User Access
CUA IBM
Information Presentation Facility IPF
Operating System/2 OS/2
PM Presentation Manager
Proprinter SAA
System Application Architecture WIN-OS/2
Workplace Shell
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
C++ American Telephone and Telegraph Company
Helvetica Linotype Company
Microsoft Corporation Novell
Novell, Inc. PCMCIA
Windows Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association
Other company, product, and service names, which may be denoted by a double
asterisk (**), may be trademarks or service marks of others.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This glossary defines many of the terms used in this book. It includes terms
and definitions from the IBM Dictionary of Computing, as well as terms specific
to the OS/2 operating system and the Presentation Manager. It is not a complete
glossary for the entire OS/2 operating system; nor is it a complete dictionary
of computer terms.
Other primary sources for these definitions are:
The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems, ANSI
X3.172-1990, copyrighted 1990 by the American National Standards
Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036. These
definitions are identified by the symbol (A) after the definition.
The Information Technology Vocabulary, developed by Subcommittee 1, Joint
Technical Committee 1, of the International Organization for
Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission
(ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1). Definitions of published parts of this vocabulary are
identified by the symbol (I) after the definition; definitions taken from
draft international standards, committee drafts, and working papers being
developed by ISO/IEC JTC1/SC1 are identified by the symbol (T) after the
definition, indicating that final agreement has not yet been reached
among the participating National Bodies of SC1.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Glossary Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select a starting letter of glossary terms:
A N
B O
C P
D Q
E R
F S
G T
H U
I V
J W
K X
L Y
M Z
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - A ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
accelerator -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a key or combination of
keys that invokes an application-defined function.
accelerator table -A table used to define which key strokes are treated as
accelerators and the commands they are translated into.
access mode -The manner in which an application gains access to a file it has
opened. Examples of access modes are read-only, write-only, and read/write.
access permission -All access rights that a user has regarding an object. (I)
action -One of a set of defined tasks that a computer performs. Users request
the application to perform an action in several ways, such as typing a
command, pressing a function key, or selecting the action name from an
action bar or menu.
action bar -In SAA Common User Access architecture, the area at the top of a
window that contains choices that give a user access to actions available in
that window.
action point -The current position on the screen at which the pointer is
pointing. Contrast with hot spot and input focus.
active program -A program currently running on the computer. An active
program can be interactive (running and receiving input from the user) or
noninteractive (running but not receiving input from the user). See also
interactive program and noninteractive program.
active window -The window with which the user is currently interacting.
address space -(1) The range of addresses available to a program. (A) (2)
The area of virtual storage available for a particular job.
alphanumeric video output -Output to the logical video buffer when the video
adapter is in text mode and the logical video buffer is addressed by an
application as a rectangular array of character cells.
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange -The standard
code, using a coded character set consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8
bits including parity check), that is used for information interchange among
data processing systems, data communication systems, and associated
equipment. The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphic
characters. (A)
Note: IBM has defined an extension to ASCII code (characters 128-255).
anchor -A window procedure that handles Presentation Manager message
conversions between an icon procedure and an application.
anchor block -An area of Presentation-Manager-internal resources to allocated
process or thread that calls WinInitialize.
anchor point -A point in a window used by a program designer or by a window
manager to position a subsequently appearing window.
ANSI -American National Standards Institute.
APA -All points addressable.
API -Application programming interface.
application -A collection of software components used to perform specific
types of work on a computer; for example, a payroll application, an airline
reservation application, a network application.
application object -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a form
that an application provides for a user; for example, a spreadsheet form.
Contrast with user object.
application programming interface (API) -A functional interface supplied by
the operating system or by a separately orderable licensed program that
allows an application program written in a high-level language to use
specific data or functions of the operating system or the licensed program.
application-modal -Pertaining to a message box or dialog box for which
processing must be completed before further interaction with any other
window owned by the same application may take place.
area -In computer graphics, a filled shape such as a solid rectangle.
ASCII -American National Standard Code for Information Interchange.
ASCIIZ -A string of ASCII characters that is terminated with a byte
containing the value 0.
aspect ratio -In computer graphics, the width-to-height ratio of an area,
symbol, or shape.
asynchronous (ASYNC) -(1) Pertaining to two or more processes that do not
depend upon the occurrence of specific events such as common timing
signals. (T) (2) Without regular time relationship; unexpected or
unpredictable with respect to the execution of program instructions. See
also synchronous.
atom -A constant that represents a string. As soon as a string has been
defined as an atom, the atom can be used in place of the string to save
space. Strings are associated with their respective atoms in an atom table.
See also integer atom.
atom table -A table used to relate atoms with the strings that they
represent. Also in the table is the mechanism by which the presence of a
string can be checked.
atomic operation -An operation that completes its work on an object before
another operation can be performed on the same object.
attribute -A characteristic or property that can be controlled, usually to
obtain a required appearance; for example, the color of a line. See also
graphics attributes and segment attributes.
automatic link -In Information Presentation Facility (IPF), a link that
begins a chain reaction at the primary window. When the user selects the
primary window, an automatic link is activated to display secondary windows.
AVIO -Advanced Video Input/Output.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - B ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
BВzier curve -(1) A mathematical technique of specifying smooth continuous
lines and surfaces, which require a starting point and a finishing point
with several intermediate points that influence or control the path of the
linking curve. Named after Dr. P. BВzier. (2) (D of C) In the AIX Graphics
Library, a cubic spline approximation to a set of four control points that
passes through the first and fourth control points and that has a continuous
slope where two spline segments meet. Named after Dr. P. BВzier.
background -(1) In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority
programs are executed. Contrast with foreground. (2) An active session that
is not currently displayed on the screen.
background color -The color in which the background of a graphic primitive is
drawn.
background mix -An attribute that determines how the background of a graphic
primitive is combined with the existing color of the graphics presentation
space. Contrast with mix.
background program -In multiprogramming, a program that executes with a low
priority. Contrast with foreground program.
bit map -A representation in memory of the data displayed on an APA device,
usually the screen.
block -(1) A string of data elements recorded or transmitted as a unit. The
elements may be characters, words, or logical records. (T) (2) To record
data in a block. (3) A collection of contiguous records recorded as a unit.
Blocks are separated by interblock gaps and each block may contain one or
more records. (A)
block device -A storage device that performs I/O operations on blocks of data
called sectors. Data on block devices can be randomly accessed. Block
devices are designated by a drive letter (for example, C:).
blocking mode -A condition set by an application that determines when its
threads might block. For example, an application might set the Pipemode
parameter for the DosCreateNPipe function so that its threads perform I/O
operations to the named pipe block when no data is available.
border -A visual indication (for example, a separator line or a background
color) of the boundaries of a window.
boundary determination -An operation used to compute the size of the smallest
rectangle that encloses a graphics object on the screen.
breakpoint -(1) A point in a computer program where execution may be halted.
A breakpoint is usually at the beginning of an instruction where halts,
caused by external intervention, are convenient for resuming
execution. (T) (2) A place in a program, specified by a command or a
condition, where the system halts execution and gives control to the
workstation user or to a specified program.
broken pipe -When all of the handles that access one end of a pipe have been
closed.
bucket -One or more fields in which the result of an operation is kept.
buffer -(1) A portion of storage used to hold input or output data
temporarily. (2) To allocate and schedule the use of buffers. (A)
button -A mechanism used to request or initiate an action. See also barrel
buttons, bezel buttons, mouse button, push button, and radio button.
byte pipe -Pipes that handle data as byte streams. All unnamed pipes are byte
pipes. Named pipes can be byte pipes or message pipes. See byte stream.
byte stream -Data that consists of an unbroken stream of bytes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - C ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
cache -A high-speed buffer storage that contains frequently accessed
instructions and data; it is used to reduce access time.
cached micro presentation space -A presentation space from a
Presentation-Manager-owned store of micro presentation spaces. It can be
used for drawing to a window only, and must be returned to the store when
the task is complete.
CAD -Computer-Aided Design.
call -(1) The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a
subroutine into effect, usually by specifying the entry conditions and
jumping to an entry point. (I) (A) (2) To transfer control to a procedure,
program, routine, or subroutine.
calling sequence -A sequence of instructions together with any associated
data necessary to execute a call. (T)
Cancel -An action that removes the current window or menu without processing
it, and returns the previous window.
cascaded menu -In the OS/2 operating system, a menu that appears when the
arrow to the right of a cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of
choices that are related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to
reduce the length of a menu. See also cascading choice.
cascading choice -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a choice in a menu
that, when selected, produces a cascaded menu containing other choices. An
arrow () appears to the right of the cascading choice.
CASE statement -In PM programming, provides the body of a window procedure.
There is usually one CASE statement for each message type supported by an
application.
CGA -Color graphics adapter.
chained list -A list in which the data elements may be dispersed but in which
each data element contains information for locating the
next. (T)Synonymous with linked list.
character -A letter, digit, or other symbol.
character box -In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world
coordinates, the horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single
character from a character set. See also character mode. Contrast with
character cell.
character cell -The physical, rectangular space in which any single character
is displayed on a screen or printer device. Position is addressed by row and
column coordinates. Contrast with character box.
character code -The means of addressing a character in a character set,
sometimes called code point.
character device -A device that performs I/O operations on one character at a
time. Because character devices view data as a stream of bytes,
character-device data cannot be randomly accessed. Character devices include
the keyboard, mouse, and printer, and are referred to by name.
character mode -A mode that, in conjunction with the font type, determines
the extent to which graphics characters are affected by the character box,
shear, and angle attributes.
character set -(1) An ordered set of unique representations called
characters; for example, the 26 letters of English alphabet, Boolean 0 and
1, the set of symbols in the Morse code, and the 128 ASCII
characters. (A) (2) All the valid characters for a programming language or
for a computer system. (3) A group of characters used for a specific reason;
for example, the set of characters a printer can print.
check box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a square box with
associated text that represents a choice. When a user selects a choice, an X
appears in the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. The user
can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio
button.
check mark - (1) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a
symbol that shows that a choice is currently in effect. (2) The symbol that
is used to indicate a selected item on a pull-down menu.
child process -In the OS/2 operating system, a process started by another
process, which is called the parent process. Contrast with parent process.
child window -A window that appears within the border of its parent window
(either a primary window or another child window). When the parent window is
resized, moved, or destroyed, the child window also is resized, moved, or
destroyed; however, the child window can be moved or resized independently
from the parent window, within the boundaries of the parent window. Contrast
with parent window.
choice -(1) An option that can be selected. The choice can be presented as
text, as a symbol (number or letter), or as an icon (a pictorial symbol).
(2) (D of C) In SAA Common User Access architecture, an item that a user can
select.
chord -(1) To press more than one button on a pointing device while the
pointer is within the limits that the user has specified for the operating
environment. (2) (D of C) In graphics, a short line segment whose end points
lie on a circle. Chords are a means for producing a circular image from
straight lines. The higher the number of chords per circle, the smoother the
circular image.
class -A way of categorizing objects based on their behavior and shape. A
class is, in effect, a definition of a generic object. In SOM, a class is a
special kind of object that can manufacture other objects that all have a
common shape and exhibit similar behavior (more precisely, all of the
objects manufactured by a class have the same memory layout and share a
common set of methods). New classes can be defined in terms of existing
classes through a technique known as inheritance.
class method -A class method of class <X> is a method provided by the
metaclass of class <X>. Class methods are executed without requiring any
instances of class <X> to exist, and are frequently used to create
instances. In System Object Model, an action that can be performed on a
class object.
class object -In System Object Model, the run-time implementation of a class.
class style -The set of properties that apply to every window in a window
class.
client -(1) A functional unit that receives shared services from a
server. (T) (2) A user, as in a client process that uses a named pipe or
queue that is created and owned by a server process.
client area -The part of the window, inside the border, that is below the
menu bar. It is the user's work space, where a user types information and
selects choices from selection fields. In primary windows, it is where an
application programmer presents the objects that a user works on.
client program -An application that creates and manipulates instances of
classes.
client window -The window in which the application displays output and
receives input. This window is located inside the frame window, under the
window title bar and any menu bar, and within any scroll bars.
clip limits -The area of the paper that can be reached by a printer or
plotter.
clipboard -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an area of computer
memory, or storage, that temporarily holds data. Data in the clipboard is
available to other applications.
clipping -In computer graphics, removing those parts of a display image that
lie outside a given boundary. (I) (A)
clipping area -The area in which the window can paint.
clipping path -A clipping boundary in world-coordinate space.
clock tick -The minimum unit of time that the system tracks. If the system
timer currently counts at a rate of X Hz, the system tracks the time every
1/X of a second. Also known as time tick.
CLOCK$ -Character-device name reserved for the system clock.
code page -An assignment of graphic characters and control-function meanings
to all code points.
code point -(1) Synonym for character code. (2) (D of C) A 1-byte code
representing one of 256 potential characters.
code segment -An executable section of programming code within a load module.
color dithering -See dithering.
color graphics adapter (CGA) -An adapter that simultaneously provides four
colors and is supported by all IBM Personal Computer and Personal System/2
models.
command -The name and parameters associated with an action that a program can
perform.
command area -An area composed of a command field prompt and a command entry
field.
command entry field -An entry field in which users type commands.
command line -On a display screen, a display line, sometimes at the bottom of
the screen, in which only commands can be entered.
command mode -A state of a system or device in which the user can enter
commands.
command prompt -A field prompt showing the location of the command entry
field in a panel.
Common Programming Interface (CPI) -Definitions of those application
development languages and services that have, or are intended to have,
implementations on and a high degree of commonality across the SAA
environments. One of the three SAA architectural areas. See also Common User
Access architecture.
Common User Access (CUA) architecture - Guidelines for the dialog between a
human and a workstation or terminal. One of the three SAA architectural
areas. See also Common Programming Interface.
compile -To translate a program written in a higher-level programming
language into a machine language program.
composite window -A window composed of other windows (such as a frame window,
frame-control windows, and a client window) that are kept together as a unit
and that interact with each other.
computer-aided design (CAD) -The use of a computer to design or change a
product, tool, or machine, such as using a computer for drafting or
illustrating.
COM1, COM2, COM3 -Character-device names reserved for serial ports 1 through
3.
CON -Character-device name reserved for the console keyboard and screen.
conditional cascaded menu -A pull-down menu associated with a menu item that
has a cascade mini-push button beside it in an object's pop-up menu. The
conditional cascaded menu is displayed when the user selects the mini-push
button.
container -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an object that holds other
objects. A folder is an example of a container object. See also folder and
object.
contextual help -In SAA Common User Access Architecture, help that gives
specific information about the item the cursor is on. The help is contextual
because it provides information about a specific item as it is currently
being used. Contrast with extended help.
contiguous -Touching or joining at a common edge or boundary, for example, an
unbroken consecutive series of storage locations.
control -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a component of the
user interface that allows a user to select choices or type information; for
example, a check box, an entry field, a radio button.
control area -A storage area used by a computer program to hold control information. (I) (A)
Control Panel -In the Presentation Manager, a program used to set up user
preferences that act globally across the system.
Control Program -(1) The basic functions of the operating system, including
DOS emulation and the support for keyboard, mouse, and video input/output.
(2) A computer program designed to schedule and to supervise the execution
of programs of a computer system. (I) (A)
control window -A window that is used as part of a composite window to
perform simple input and output tasks. Radio buttons and check boxes are
examples.
control word -An instruction within a document that identifies its parts or
indicates how to format the document.
coordinate space -A two-dimensional set of points used to generate output on
a video display of printer.
Copy -A choice that places onto the clipboard, a copy of what the user has
selected. See also Cut and Paste.
correlation -The action of determining which element or object within a
picture is at a given position on the display. This follows a pick
operation.
coverpage window -A window in which the application's help information is
displayed.
CPI -Common Programming Interface.
critical extended attribute -An extended attribute that is necessary for the
correct operation of the system or a particular application.
critical section -(1) In programming languages, a part of an asynchronous
procedure that cannot be executed simultaneously with a certain part of
another asynchronous procedure. (I)
Note: Part of the other asynchronous procedure also is a critical section.
(2) A section of code that is not reentrant; that is, code that can be
executed by only one thread at a time.
CUA architecture -Common User Access architecture.
current position -In computer graphics, the position, in user coordinates,
that becomes the starting point for the next graphics routine, if that
routine does not explicitly specify a starting point.
cursor -A symbol displayed on the screen and associated with an input device.
The cursor indicates where input from the device will be placed. Types of
cursors include text cursors, graphics cursors, and selection cursors.
Contrast with pointer and input focus.
Cut -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a choice that removes a selected
object, or a part of an object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the
space it occupied in a window. See also Copy and Paste.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - D ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
daisy chain -A method of device interconnection for determining interrupt
priority by connecting the interrupt sources serially.
data segment -A nonexecutable section of a program module; that is, a section
of a program that contains data definitions.
data structure -The syntactic structure of symbolic expressions and their
storage-allocation characteristics. (T)
data transfer -The movement of data from one object to another by way of the
clipboard or by direct manipulation.
DBCS -Double-byte character set.
DDE -Dynamic data exchange.
deadlock -(1) Unresolved contention for the use of a resource. (2) An error
condition in which processing cannot continue because each of two elements
of the process is waiting for an action by, or a response from, the other.
(3) An impasse that occurs when multiple processes are waiting for the
availability of a resource that will not become available because it is
being held by another process that is in a similar wait state.
debug -To detect, diagnose, and eliminate errors in programs. (T)
decipoint -In printing, one tenth of a point. There are 72 points in an
inch.
default procedure -A function provided by the Presentation Manager Interface
that may be used to process standard messages from dialogs or windows.
default value -A value assumed when no value has been specified. Synonymous
with assumed value. For example, in the graphics programming interface, the
default line-type is 'solid'.
definition list -A type of list that pairs a term and its description.
delta -An application-defined threshold, or number of container items, from
either end of the list.
descendant -See child process.
descriptive text -Text used in addition to a field prompt to give more
information about a field.
Deselect all -A choice that cancels the selection of all of the objects that
have been selected in that window.
Desktop Manager -In the Presentation Manager, a window that displays a list
of groups of programs, each of which can be started or stopped.
desktop window -The window, corresponding to the physical device, against
which all other types of windows are established.
detached process -A background process that runs independent of the parent
process.
detent -A point on a slider that represents an exact value to which a user
can move the slider arm.
device context -A logical description of a data destination such as memory,
metafile, display, printer, or plotter. See also direct device context,
information device context, memory device context, metafile device context,
queued device context, and screen device context.
device driver -A file that contains the code needed to attach and use a
device such as a display, printer, or plotter.
device space -(1) Coordinate space in which graphics are assembled after all
GPI transformations have been applied. Device space is defined in
device-specific units. (2) ( D of C) In computer graphics, a space defined
by the complete set of addressable points of a display device. (A)
dialog -The interchange of information between a computer and its user
through a sequence of requests by the user and the presentation of responses
by the computer.
dialog box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a movable
window, fixed in size, containing controls that a user uses to provide
information required by an application so that it can continue to process a
user request. See also message box, primary window, secondary window. Also
known as a pop-up window.
Dialog Box Editor -A WYSIWYG editor that creates dialog boxes for
communicating with the application user.
dialog item -A component (for example, a menu or a button) of a dialog box.
Dialog items are also used when creating dialog templates.
dialog procedure -A dialog window that is controlled by a window procedure.
It is responsible for responding to all messages sent to the dialog window.
dialog tag language -A markup language used by the DTL compiler to create
dialog objects.
dialog template -The definition of a dialog box, which contains details of
its position, appearance, and window ID, and the window ID of each of its
child windows.
direct device context -A logical description of a data destination that is a
device other than the screen (for example, a printer or plotter), and where
the output is not to go through the spooler. Its purpose is to satisfy
queries. See also device context.
direct manipulation -The user's ability to interact with an object by using
the mouse, typically by dragging an object around on the Desktop and
dropping it on other objects.
direct memory access (DMA) -A technique for moving data directly between main
storage and peripheral equipment without requiring processing of the data by
the processing unit.(T)
directory -A type of file containing the names and controlling information
for other files or other directories.
display point -Synonym for pel.
dithering -(1) The process used in color displays whereby every other pel is
set to one color, and the intermediate pels are set to another. Together
they produce the effect of a third color at normal viewing distances. This
process can only be used on solid areas of color; it does not work, for
example, on narrow lines. (2) (D of C ) In computer graphics, a technique of
interleaving dark and light pixels so that the resulting image looks
smoothly shaded when viewed from a distance.
DMA -Direct memory access.
DOS Protect Mode Interface (DPMI) -An interface between protect mode and real
mode programs.
double-byte character set (DBCS) -A set of characters in which each character
is represented by two bytes. Languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and
Korean, which contain more characters than can be represented by 256 code
points, require double-byte character sets. Since each character requires
two bytes, the entering, displaying, and printing of DBCS characters
requires hardware and software that can support DBCS.
doubleword -A contiguous sequence of bits or characters that comprises two
computer words and is capable of being addressed as a unit. (A)
DPMI -DOS Protect Mode Interface.
drag -In SAA Common User Access, to use a pointing device to move an object;
for example, clicking on a window border, and dragging it to make the window
larger.
dragging -(1) In computer graphics, moving an object on the display screen as
if it were attached to the pointer. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics,
moving one or more segments on a display surface by translating. (I) (A)
drawing chain -See segment chain.
drop -To fix the position of an object that is being dragged, by releasing
the select button of the pointing device. See also drag.
DTL -Dialog tag language.
dual-boot function -A feature of the OS/2 operating system that allows the
user to start DOS from within the operating system, or an OS/2 session from
within DOS.
duplex -Pertaining to communication in which data can be sent and received at
the same time. Synonymous with full duplex.
dynamic data exchange (DDE) -A message protocol used to communicate between
applications that share data. The protocol uses shared memory as the means
of exchanging data between applications.
dynamic data formatting -A formatting procedure that enables you to
incorporate text, bit maps or metafiles in an IPF window at execution time.
dynamic link library -A collection of executable programming code and data
that is bound to an application at load time or run time, rather than during
linking. The programming code and data in a dynamic link library can be
shared by several applications simultaneously.
dynamic linking -The process of resolving external references in a program
module at load time or run time rather than during linking.
dynamic segments -Graphics segments drawn in exclusive-OR mix mode so that
they can be moved from one screen position to another without affecting the
rest of the displayed picture.
dynamic storage -(1) A device that stores data in a manner that permits the
data to move or vary with time such that the specified data is not always
available for recovery. (A) (2) A storage in which the cells require
repetitive application of control signals in order to retain stored data.
Such repetitive application of the control signals is called a refresh
operation. A dynamic storage may use static addressing or sensing
circuits. (A) (3) See also static storage.
dynamic time slicing -Varies the size of the time slice depending on system
load and paging activity.
dynamic-link module -A module that is linked at load time or run time.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
EBCDIC -Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. A coded character set
consisting of 8-bit coded characters (9 bits including parity check), used
for information interchange among data processing systems, data
communications systems, and associated equipment.
edge-triggered -Pertaining to an event semaphore that is posted then reset
before a waiting thread gets a chance to run. The semaphore is considered to
be posted for the rest of that thread's waiting period; the thread does not
have to wait for the semaphore to be posted again.
EGA -Extended graphics adapter.
element -An entry in a graphics segment that comprises one or more graphics
orders and that is addressed by the element pointer.
EMS -Expanded Memory Specification.
encapsulation -Hiding an object's implementation, that is, its private,
internal data and methods. Private variables and methods are accessible only
to the object that contains them.
entry field -In SAA Common User Access architecture, an area where a user
types information. Its boundaries are usually indicated. See also selection
field.
entry panel -A defined panel type containing one or more entry fields and
protected information such as headings, prompts, and explanatory text.
entry-field control -The component of a user interface that provides the
means by which the application receives data entered by the user in an entry
field. When it has the input focus, the entry field displays a flashing
pointer at the position where the next typed character will go.
environment segment -The list of environment variables and their values for a
process.
environment strings -ASCII text strings that define the value of environment
variables.
environment variables -Variables that describe the execution environment of a
process. These variables are named by the operating system or by the
application. Environment variables named by the operating system are PATH,
DPATH, INCLUDE, INIT, LIB, PROMPT, and TEMP. The values of environment
variables are defined by the user in the CONFIG.SYS file, or by using the
SET command at the OS/2 command prompt.
error message -An indication that an error has been detected. (A)
event semaphore -A semaphore that enables a thread to signal a waiting thread
or threads that an event has occurred or that a task has been completed. The
waiting threads can then perform an action that is dependent on the
completion of the signaled event.
exception -An abnormal condition such as an I/O error encountered in
processing a data set or a file.
exclusive system semaphore -A system semaphore that can be modified only by
threads within the same process.
executable file -(1) A file that contains programs or commands that perform
operations or actions to be taken. (2) A collection of related data records
that execute programs.
exit -To execute an instruction within a portion of a computer program in
order to terminate the execution of that portion. Such portions of computer
programs include loops, subroutines, modules, and so on. (T) Repeated exit
requests return the user to the point from which all functions provided to
the system are accessible. Contrast with cancel.
expanded memory specification (EMS) -Enables DOS applications to access
memory above the 1MB real mode addressing limit.
extended attribute -An additional piece of information about a file object,
such as its data format or category. It consists of a name and a value. A
file object may have more than one extended attribute associated with it.
extended help -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
provides information about the contents of the application window from which
a user requested help. Contrast with contextual help.
extended-choice selection -A mode that allows the user to select more than
one item from a window. Not all windows allow extended choice selection.
Contrast with multiple-choice selection.
extent -Continuous space on a disk or diskette that is occupied by or
reserved for a particular data set, data space, or file.
external link -In Information Presentation Facility, a link that connects
external online document files.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - F ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
family-mode application -An application program that can run in the OS/2
environment and in the DOS environment; however, it cannot take advantage of
many of the OS/2-mode facilities, such as multitasking, interprocess
communication, and dynamic linking.
FAT -File allocation table.
FEA -Full extended attribute.
field-level help -Information specific to the field on which the cursor is
positioned. This help function is "contextual" because it provides
information about a specific item as it is currently used; the information
is dependent upon the context within the work session.
FIFO -First-in-first-out. (A)
file -A named set of records stored or processed as a unit. (T)
file allocation table (FAT) -In IBM personal computers, a table used by the
operating system to allocate space on a disk for a file, and to locate and
chain together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors
so that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner.
file attribute -Any of the attributes that describe the characteristics of a
file.
File Manager -In the Presentation Manager, a program that displays
directories and files, and allows various actions on them.
file specification -The full identifier for a file, which includes its drive
designation, path, file name, and extension.
file system -The combination of software and hardware that supports storing
information on a storage device.
file system driver (FSD) -A program that manages file I\O and controls the
format of information on the storage media.
fillet -A curve that is tangential to the end points of two adjoining lines.
See also polyfillet.
filtering -An application process that changes the order of data in a queue.
first-in-first-out (FIFO) -A queuing technique in which the next item to be
retrieved is the item that has been in the queue for the longest time. (A)
flag -(1) An indicator or parameter that shows the setting of a switch. (2) A
character that signals the occurrence of some condition, such as the end of
a word. (A) (3) (D of C) A characteristic of a file or directory that
enables it to be used in certain ways. See also archive flag, hidden flag,
and read-only flag.
focus -See input focus.
folder -A container used to organize objects.
font -A particular size and style of typeface that contains definitions of
character sets, marker sets, and pattern sets.
Font Editor -A utility program provided with the IBM Developers Toolkit that
enables the design and creation of new fonts.
foreground program -(1) The program with which the user is currently
interacting. Also known as interactive program. Contrast with background
program. (2) (D of C) In multiprogramming, a high-priority program.
frame -The part of a window that can contain several different visual
elements specified by the application, but drawn and controlled by the
Presentation Manager. The frame encloses the client area.
frame styles -Standard window layouts provided by the Presentation Manager.
FSD -File system driver.
full-duplex -Synonym for duplex.
full-screen application -An application that has complete control of the
screen.
function -(1) In a programming language, a block, with or without formal
parameters, whose execution is invoked by means of a call. (2) A set of
related control statements that cause one or more programs to be performed.
function key -A key that causes a specified sequence of operations to be
performed when it is pressed, for example, F1 and Alt-K.
function key area -The area at the bottom of a window that contains function
key assignments such as F1=Help.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - G ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
GDT -Global Descriptor Table.
general protection fault -An exception condition that occurs when a process
attempts to use storage or a module that has some level of protection
assigned to it, such as I/O privilege level. See also IOPL code segment.
Global Descriptor Table (GDT) -A table that defines code and data segments
available to all tasks in an application.
global dynamic-link module -A dynamic-link module that can be shared by all
processes in the system that refer to the module name.
global file-name character -Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*)
used as a variable in a file name or file name extension when referring to a
particular file or group of files.
glyph -A graphic symbol whose appearance conveys information.
GPI -Graphics programming interface.
graphic primitive -In computer graphics, a basic element, such as an arc or a
line, that is not made up of smaller parts and that is used to create
diagrams and pictures. See also graphics segment.
graphics -(1) A picture defined in terms of graphic primitives and graphics
attributes. (2) (D of C) The making of charts and pictures. (3) Pertaining
to charts, tables, and their creation. (4) See computer graphics, coordinate
graphics, fixed-image graphics, interactive graphics, passive graphics,
raster graphics.
graphics attributes -Attributes that apply to graphic primitives. Examples
are color, line type, and shading-pattern definition. See also segment
attributes.
graphics field -The clipping boundary that defines the visible part of the
presentation-page contents.
graphics mode -One of several states of a display. The mode determines the
resolution and color content of the screen.
graphics model space -The conceptual coordinate space in which a picture is
constructed after any model transforms have been applied. Also known as
model space.
Graphics programming interface -The formally defined programming language
that is between an IBM graphics program and the user of the program.
graphics segment -A sequence of related graphic primitives and graphics
attributes. See also graphic primitive.
graying -The indication that a choice on a pull-down is unavailable.
group -A collection of logically connected controls. For example, the buttons
controlling paper size for a printer could be called a group. See also
program group.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - H ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
handle -(1) An identifier that represents an object, such as a device or
window, to the Presentation Interface. (2) (D of C) In the Advanced DOS and
OS/2 operating systems, a binary value created by the system that identifies
a drive, directory, and file so that the file can be found and opened.
hard error -An error condition on a network that requires either that the
system be reconfigured or that the source of the error be removed before the
system can resume reliable operation.
header -(1) System-defined control information that precedes user data. (2)
The portion of a message that contains control information for the message,
such as one or more destination fields, name of the originating station,
input sequence number, character string indicating the type of message, and
priority level for the message.
heading tags -A document element that enables information to be displayed in
windows, and that controls entries in the contents window controls placement
of push buttons in a window, and defines the shape and size of windows.
heap -An area of free storage available for dynamic allocation by an
application. Its size varies according to the storage requirements of the
application.
help function -(1) A function that provides information about a specific
field, an application panel, or information about the help facility. (2) (D
of C) One or more display images that describe how to use application
software or how to do a system operation.
Help index -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
provides an index of the help information available for an application.
help panel -A panel with information to assist users that is displayed in
response to a help request from the user.
help window -A Common-User-Access-defined secondary window that displays
information when the user requests help.
hidden file -An operating system file that is not displayed by a directory
listing.
hide button -In the OS/2 operating system, a small, square button located in
the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window that, when selected,
removes from the screen all the windows associated with that window.
Contrast with maximize button. See also restore button.
hierarchical inheritance -The relationship between parent and child classes.
An object that is lower in the inheritance hierarchy than another object,
inherits all the characteristics and behaviors of the objects above it in
the hierarchy.
hierarchy -A tree of segments beginning with the root segment and proceeding
downward to dependent segment types.
high-performance file system (HPFS) -In the OS/2 operating system, an
installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a
cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes. The file system also
supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single
personal computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage
devices. File names used with the HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.
hit testing -The means of identifying which window is associated with which
input device event.
hook -A point in a system-defined function where an application can supply
additional code that the system processes as though it were part of the
function.
hook chain -A sequence of hook procedures that are "chained" together so that
each event is passed, in turn, to each procedure in the chain.
hot spot -The part of the pointer that must touch an object before it can be
selected. This is usually the tip of the pointer. Contrast with action
point.
HPFS -high-performance file system.
hypergraphic link -A connection between one piece of information and another
through the use of graphics.
hypertext -A way of presenting information online with connections between
one piece of information and another, called hypertext links. See also
hypertext link.
hypertext link -A connection between one piece of information and another.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
I/O operation -An input operation to, or output operation from a device
attached to a computer.
I-beam pointer -A pointer that indicates an area, such as an entry field in
which text can be edited.
icon -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a graphical
representation of an object, consisting of an image, image background, and a
label. Icons can represent items (such as a document file) that the user
wants to work on, and actions that the user wants to perform. In the
Presentation Manager, icons are used for data objects, system actions, and
minimized programs.
icon area -In the Presentation Manager, the area at the bottom of the screen
that is normally used to display the icons for minimized programs.
Icon Editor -The Presentation Manager-provided tool for creating icons.
IDL -Interface Definition Language.
image font -A set of symbols, each of which is described in a rectangular
array of pels. Some of the pels in the array are set to produce the image of
one of the symbols. Contrast with outline font.
implied metaclass -Subclassing the metaclass of a parent class without a
separate CSC for the resultant metaclass.
indirect manipulation -Interaction with an object through choices and
controls.
information device context -A logical description of a data destination other
than the screen (for example, a printer or plotter), but where no output
will occur. Its purpose is to satisfy queries. See also device context.
information panel -A defined panel type characterized by a body containing
only protected information.
Information Presentation Facility (IPF) -A facility provided by the OS/2
operating system, by which application developers can produce online
documentation and context-sensitive online help panels for their
applications.
inheritance -The technique of specifying the shape and behavior of one class
(called a subclass) as incremental differences from another class (called
the parent class or superclass). The subclass inherits the superclass' state
representation and methods, and can provide additional data elements and
methods. The subclass also can provide new functions with the same method
names used by the superclass. Such a subclass method is said to override the
superclass method, and will be selected automatically by method resolution
on subclass instances. An overriding method can elect to call upon the
superclass' method as part of its own implementation.
input focus -(1) The area of a window where user interaction is possible
using an input device, such as a mouse or the keyboard. (2) The position in
the active window where a user's normal interaction with the keyboard will
appear.
input router -An internal OS/2 process that removes messages from the system
queue.
input/output control -A device-specific command that requests a function of a
device driver.
installable file system (IFS) -A file system in which software is installed
when the operating system is started.
instance -(Or object instance). A specific object, as distinguished from the
abstract definition of an object referred to as its class.
instance method -A method valid for a particular object.
instruction pointer -In System/38, a pointer that provides addressability for
a machine interface instruction in a program.
integer atom -An atom that represents a predefined system constant and
carries no storage overhead. For example, names of window classes provided
by Presentation Manager are expressed as integer atoms.
interactive graphics -Graphics that can be moved or manipulated by a user at
a terminal.
interactive program -(1) A program that is running (active) and is ready to
receive (or is receiving) input from a user. (2) A running program that can
receive input from the keyboard or another input device. Compare with active
program and contrast with noninteractive program.
Also known as a foreground program.
interchange file -A file containing data that can be sent from one
Presentation Manager interface application to another.
Interface Definition Language (IDL) -Language-neutral interface specification
for a SOM class.
interpreter -A program that translates and executes each instruction of a
high-level programming language before it translates and executes.
interprocess communication (IPC) -In the OS/2 operating system, the exchange
of information between processes or threads through semaphores, pipes,
queues, and shared memory.
interval timer -(1) A timer that provides program interruptions on a
program-controlled basis. (2) An electronic counter that counts intervals of
time under program control.
IOCtl -Input/output control.
IOPL -Input/output privilege level.
IOPL code segment -An IOPL executable section of programming code that
enables an application to directly manipulate hardware interrupts and ports
without replacing the device driver. See also privilege level.
IPC -Interprocess communication.
IPF -Information Presentation Facility.
IPF compiler -A text compiler that interpret tags in a source file and
converts the information into the specified format.
IPF tag language -A markup language that provides the instructions for
displaying online information.
item -A data object that can be passed in a DDE transaction.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - J ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
journal -A special-purpose file that is used to record changes made in the
system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - K ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Kanji -A graphic character set used in Japanese ideographic alphabets.
KBD$ -Character-device name reserved for the keyboard.
kernel -The part of an operating system that performs basic functions, such
as allocating hardware resources.
kerning -The design of graphics characters so that their character boxes
overlap. Used to space text proportionally.
keyboard accelerator -A keystroke that generates a command message for an
application.
keyboard augmentation -A function that enables a user to press a keyboard key
while pressing a mouse button.
keyboard focus -A temporary attribute of a window. The window that has a
keyboard focus receives all keyboard input until the focus changes to a
different window.
Keys help -In SAA Common User Access architecture, a help action that
provides a listing of the application keys and their assigned functions.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - L ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
label -In a graphics segment, an identifier of one or more elements that is
used when editing the segment.
LAN -Local area network.
language support procedure -A function provided by the Presentation Manager
Interface for applications that do not, or cannot (as in the case of COBOL
and FORTRAN programs), provide their own dialog or window procedures.
lazy drag -See pickup and drop.
lazy drag set -See pickup set.
LDT -In the OS/2 operating system, Local Descriptor Table.
LIFO stack -A stack from which data is retrieved in last-in, first-out order.
linear address -A unique value that identifies the memory object.
linked list -Synonym for chained list.
list box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a control that
contains scrollable choices from which a user can select one choice.
Note: In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
selection list.
list button -A button labeled with an underlined down-arrow that presents a
list of valid objects or choices that can be selected for that field.
list panel -A defined panel type that displays a list of items from which
users can select one or more choices and then specify one or more actions to
work on those choices.
load time -The point in time at which a program module is loaded into main
storage for execution.
load-on-call -A function of a linkage editor that allows selected segments of
the module to be disk resident while other segments are executing. Disk
resident segments are loaded for execution and given control when any entry
point that they contain is called.
local area network (LAN) -(1) A computer network located on a user's premises
within a limited geographical area. Communication within a local area
network is not subject to external regulations; however, communication
across the LAN boundary may be subject to some form of regulation. (T)
Note: A LAN does not use store and forward techniques. (2) A network in
which a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and
that can be connected to a larger network.
Local Descriptor Table (LDT) -Defines code and data segments specific to a
single task.
lock -A serialization mechanism by means of which a resource is restricted
for use by the holder of the lock.
logical storage device -A device that the user can map to a physical (actual)
device.
LPT1, LPT2, LPT3 -Character-device names reserved for parallel printers 1
through 3.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - M ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
main window -The window that is positioned relative to the desktop window.
manipulation button -The button on a pointing device a user presses to
directly manipulate an object.
map -(1) A set of values having a defined correspondence with the quantities
or values of another set. (I) (A) (2) To establish a set of values having
a defined correspondence with the quantities or values of another set. (I)
marker box -In computer graphics, the boundary that defines, in world
coordinates, the horizontal and vertical space occupied by a single marker
from a marker set.
marker symbol -A symbol centered on a point. Graphs and charts can use marker
symbols to indicate the plotted points.
marquee box -The rectangle that appears during a selection technique in which
a user selects objects by drawing a box around them with a pointing device.
Master Help Index -In the OS/2 operating system, an alphabetic list of help
topics related to using the operating system.
maximize -To enlarge a window to its largest possible size.
media window -The part of the physical device (display, printer, or plotter)
on which a picture is presented.
memory block -Part memory within a heap.
memory device context -A logical description of a data destination that is a
memory bit map. See also device context.
memory management -A feature of the operating system for allocating, sharing,
and freeing main storage.
memory object -Logical unit of memory requested by an application, which
forms the granular unit of memory manipulation from the application
viewpoint.
menu -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, an extension of the
menu bar that displays a list of choices available for a selected choice in
the menu bar. After a user selects a choice in menu bar, the corresponding
menu appears. Additional pop-up windows can appear from menu choices.
menu bar -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area near the
top of a window, below the title bar and above the rest of the window, that
contains choices that provide access to other menus.
menu button -The button on a pointing device that a user presses to view a
pop-up menu associated with an object.
message -(1) In the Presentation Manager, a packet of data used for
communication between the Presentation Manager interface and Presentation
Manager applications (2) In a user interface, information not requested by
users but presented to users by the computer in response to a user action or
internal process.
message box -(1) A dialog window predefined by the system and used as a
simple interface for applications, without the necessity of creating
dialog-template resources or dialog procedures. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced
Common User Access architecture, a type of window that shows messages to
users. See also dialog box, primary window, secondary window.
message filter -The means of selecting which messages from a specific window
will be handled by the application.
message queue -A sequenced collection of messages to be read by the
application.
message stream mode -A method of operation in which data is treated as a
stream of messages. Contrast with byte stream.
metacharacter -See global file-name character.
metaclass -A class whose instances are all classes. In SOM, any class
descended from SOMClass is a metaclass. The methods of a metaclass are
sometimes called "class" methods.
metafile -A file containing a series of attributes that set color, shape and
size, usually of a picture or a drawing. Using a program that can interpret
these attributes, a user can view the assembled image.
metafile device context -A logical description of a data destination that is
a metafile, which is used for graphics interchange. See also device context.
metalanguage -A language used to specify another language. For example, data
types can be described using a metalanguage so as to make the descriptions
independent of any one computer language.
method -One of the units that makes up the behavior of an object. A method is
a combination of a function and a name, such that many different functions
can have the same name. Which function the name refers to at any point in
time depends on the object that is to execute the method and is the subject
of method resolution.
method override -The replacement, by a child class, of the implementation of
a method inherited from a parent and an ancestor class.
mickey -A unit of measurement for physical mouse motion whose value depends
on the mouse device driver currently loaded.
micro presentation space -A graphics presentation space in which a restricted
set of the GPI function calls is available.
minimize -To remove from the screen all windows associated with an
application and replace them with an icon that represents the application.
mix -An attribute that determines how the foreground of a graphic primitive
is combined with the existing color of graphics output. Also known as
foreground mix. Contrast with background mix.
mixed character string -A string containing a mixture of one-byte and Kanji
or Hangeul (two-byte) characters.
mnemonic -(1) A method of selecting an item on a pull-down by means of typing
the highlighted letter in the menu item. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common
User Access architecture, usually a single character, within the text of a
choice, identified by an underscore beneath the character. If all characters
in a choice already serve as mnemonics for other choices, another character,
placed in parentheses immediately following the choice, can be used. When a
user types the mnemonic for a choice, the choice is either selected or the
cursor is moved to that choice.
modal dialog box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of
movable window, fixed in size, that requires a user to enter information
before continuing to work in the application window from which it was
displayed. Contrast with modeless dialog box. Also known as a serial dialog
box. Contrast with parallel dialog box.
Note: In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
pop-up window.
model space -See graphics model space.
modeless dialog box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type
of movable window, fixed in size, that allows users to continue their dialog
with the application without entering information in the dialog box. Also
known as a parallel dialog box. Contrast with modal dialog box.
Note: In CUA architecture, this is a programmer term. The end user term is
pop-up window.
module definition file -A file that describes the code segments within a load
module. For example, it indicates whether a code segment is loadable before
module execution begins (preload), or loadable only when referred to at run
time (load-on-call).
mouse -In SAA usage, a device that a user moves on a flat surface to position
a pointer on the screen. It allows a user to select a choice o function to
be performed or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or
drawing lines from one position to another.
MOUSE$ -Character-device name reserved for a mouse.
multiple-choice selection -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a
type of field from which a user can select one or more choices or select
none. See also check box. Contrast with extended-choice selection.
multiple-line entry field -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a
control into which a user types more than one line of information. See also
single-line entry field.
multitasking -The concurrent processing of applications or parts of
applications. A running application and its data are protected from other
concurrently running applications.
mutex semaphore -(Mutual exclusion semaphore). A semaphore that enables
threads to serialize their access to resources. Only the thread that
currently owns the mutex semaphore can gain access to the resource, thus
preventing one thread from interrupting operations being performed by
another.
muxwait semaphore -(Multiple wait semaphore). A semaphore that enables a
thread to wait either for multiple event semaphores to be posted or for
multiple mutex semaphores to be released. Alternatively, a muxwait semaphore
can be set to enable a thread to wait for any ONE of the event or mutex
semaphores in the muxwait semaphore's list to be posted or released.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - N ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
named pipe -A named buffer that provides client-to-server, server-to-client,
or full duplex communication between unrelated processes. Contrast with
unnamed pipe.
national language support (NLS) -The modification or conversion of a United
States English product to conform to the requirements of another language or
country. This can include the enabling or retrofitting of a product and the
translation of nomenclature, MRI, or documentation of a product.
nested list -A list that is contained within another list.
NLS -national language support.
non-8.3 file-name format -A file-naming convention in which file names can
consist of up to 255 characters. See also 8.3 file-name format.
noncritical extended attribute -An extended attribute that is not necessary
for the function of an application.
nondestructive read -Reading that does not erase the data in the source
location. (T)
noninteractive program -A running program that cannot receive input from the
keyboard or other input device. Compare with active program, and contrast
with interactive program.
nonretained graphics -Graphic primitives that are not remembered by the
Presentation Manager interface when they have been drawn. Contrast with
retained graphics.
null character (NUL) -(1) Character-device name reserved for a nonexistent
(dummy) device. (2) (D of C) A control character that is used to accomplish
media-fill or time-fill and that may be inserted into or removed from a
sequence of characters without affecting the meaning of the sequence;
however, the control of equipment or the format may be affected by this
character. (I) (A)
null-terminated string -A string of (n+1) characters where the (n+1)th
character is the 'null' character (0x00) Also known as 'zero-terminated'
string and 'ASCIIZ' string.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - O ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
object -The elements of data and function that programs create, manipulate,
pass as arguments, and so forth. An object is a way of associating specific
data values with a specific set of named functions (called methods) for a
period of time (referred to as the lifetime of the object). The data values
of an object are referred to as its state. In SOM, objects are created by
other objects called classes. The specification of what comprises the set of
functions and data elements that make up an object is referred to as the
definition of a class.
SOM objects offer a high degree of encapsulation. This property permits many
aspects of the implementation of an object to change without affecting
client programs that depend on the object's behavior.
object definition -See class.
object instance -See instance.
Object Interface Definition Language (OIDL) -Specification language used in
SOM Version 1 for defining classes. Replaced by Interface Definition
Language (IDL).
object window -A window that does not have a parent but which might have
child windows. An object window cannot be presented on a device.
OIDL -Object Interface Definition Language.
open -To start working with a file, directory, or other object.
ordered list -Vertical arrangements of items, with each item in the list
preceded by a number or letter.
outline font -A set of symbols, each of which is created as a series of lines
and curves. Synonymous with vector font. Contrast with image font.
output area -An area of storage reserved for output. (A)
owner window -A window into which specific events that occur in another
(owned) window are reported.
ownership -The determination of how windows communicate using messages.
owning process -The process that owns the resources that might be shared with
other processes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
page -(1) A 4KB segment of contiguous physical memory. (2) (D of C) A defined
unit of space on a storage medium.
page viewport -A boundary in device coordinates that defines the area of the
output device in which graphics are to be displayed. The presentation-page
contents are transformed automatically to the page viewport in device space.
paint -(1) The action of drawing or redrawing the contents of a window. (2)
In computer graphics, to shade an area of a display image; for example,
with crosshatching or color.
panel -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular arrangement
of information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some of the
information is not visible, a user can scroll through the information.
panel area -An area within a panel that contains related information. The
three major Common User Access-defined panel areas are the action bar, the
function key area, and the panel body.
panel area separator -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a solid,
dashed, or blank line that provides a visual distinction between two
adjacent areas of a panel.
panel body -The portion of a panel not occupied by the action bar, function
key area, title or scroll bars. The panel body can contain protected
information, selection fields, and entry fields. The layout and content of
the panel body determine the panel type.
panel body area -See client area.
panel definition -A description of the contents and characteristics of a
panel. A panel definition is the application developer's mechanism for
predefining the format to be presented to users in a window.
panel ID -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a panel identifier,
located in the upper-left corner of a panel. A user can choose whether to
display the panel ID.
panel title -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, a particular
arrangement of information that is presented in a window or pop-up. If some
of the information is not visible, a user can scroll through the
information.
paper size -The size of paper, defined in either standard U.S. or European
names (for example, A, B, A4), and measured in inches or millimeters
respectively.
parallel dialog box -See modeless dialog box.
parameter list -A list of values that provides a means of associating
addressability of data defined in a called program with data in the calling
program. It contains parameter names and the order in which they are to be
associated in the calling and called program.
parent class -See inheritance.
parent process -In the OS/2 operating system, a process that creates other
processes. Contrast with child process.
parent window -In the OS/2 operating system, a window that creates a child
window. The child window is drawn within the parent window. If the parent
window is moved, resized, or destroyed, the child window also will be moved,
resized, or destroyed. However, the child window can be moved and resized
independently from the parent window, within the boundaries of the parent
window. Contrast with child window.
partition -(1) A fixed-size division of storage. (2) On an IBM personal
computer fixed disk, one of four possible storage areas of variable size;
one may be accessed by DOS, and each of the others may be assigned to
another operating system.
Paste -A choice in the Edit pull-down that a user selects to move the
contents of the clipboard into a preselected location. See also Copy and
Cut.
path -The route used to locate files; the storage location of a file. A fully
qualified path lists the drive identifier, directory name, subdirectory name
(if any), and file name with the associated extension.
PDD -Physical device driver.
peeking -An action taken by any thread in the process that owns the queue to
examine queue elements without removing them.
pel -(1) The smallest area of a display screen capable of being addressed and
switched between visible and invisible states. Synonym for display point,
pixel, and picture element. (2) (D of C) Picture element.
persistent object -An object whose instance data and state are preserved
between system shutdown and system startup.
physical device driver (PDD) -A system interface that handles hardware
interrupts and supports a set of input and output functions.
pick -To select part of a displayed object using the pointer.
pickup -To add an object or set of objects to the pickup set.
pickup and drop -A drag operation that does not require the direct
manipulation button to be pressed for the duration of the drag.
pickup set -The set of objects that have been picked up as part of a pickup
and drop operation.
picture chain -See segment chain.
picture element -(1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) In computer graphics, the
smallest element of a display surface that can be independently assigned
color and intensity. (T) . (3) The area of the finest detail that can be
reproduced effectively on the recording medium.
PID -Process identification.
pipe -(1) A named or unnamed buffer used to pass data between processes. A
process reads from or writes to a pipe as if the pipe were a standard-input
or standard-output file. See also named pipe and unnamed pipe. (2) (D of C)
To direct data so that the output from one process becomes the input to
another process. The standard output of one command can be connected to the
standard input of another with the pipe operator (|).
pixel -(1) Synonym for pel. (2) (D of C) Picture element.
plotter -An output unit that directly produces a hardcopy record of data on a
removable medium, in the form of a two-dimensional graphic representation. (T)
PM -Presentation Manager.
pointer -(1) The symbol displayed on the screen that is moved by a pointing
device, such as a mouse. The pointer is used to point at items that users
can select. Contrast with cursor. (2) A data element that indicates the
location of another data element. (T)
POINTER$ -Character-device name reserved for a pointer device (mouse screen
support).
pointing device -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, an
instrument, such as a mouse, trackball, or joystick, used to move a pointer
on the screen.
pointings -Pairs of x-y coordinates produced by an operator defining
positions on a screen with a pointing device, such as a mouse.
polyfillet -A curve based on a sequence of lines. The curve is tangential to
the end points of the first and last lines, and tangential also to the
midpoints of all other lines. See also fillet.
polygon -One or more closed figures that can be drawn filled, outlined, or
filled and outlined.
polyline -A sequence of adjoining lines.
polymorphism -The ability to have different implementations of the same
method for two or more classes of objects.
pop -To retrieve an item from a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast
with push.
pop-up menu -A menu that lists the actions that a user can perform on an
object. The contents of the pop-up menu can vary depending on the context,
or state, of the object.
pop-up window -(1) A window that appears on top of another window in a
dialog. Each pop-up window must be completed before returning to the
underlying window. (2) (D of C) In SAA Advanced Common User Access
architecture, a movable window, fixed in size, in which a user provides
information required by an application so that it can continue to process a
user request.
presentation drivers -Special purpose I/O routines that handle field
device-independent I/O requests from the PM and its applications.
Presentation Manager (PM) -The interface of the OS/2 operating system that
presents, in windows a graphics-based interface to applications and files
installed and running under the OS/2 operating system.
presentation page -The coordinate space in which a picture is assembled for
display.
presentation space (PS) -(1) Contains the device-independent definition of a
picture. (2) (D of C) The display space on a display device.
primary window -In SAA Common User Access architecture, the window in which
the main interaction between the user and the application takes place. In a
multiprogramming environment, each application starts in its own primary
window. The primary window remains for the duration of the application,
although the panel displayed will change as the user's dialog moves forward.
See also secondary window.
primitive -In computer graphics, one of several simple functions for drawing
on the screen, including, for example, the rectangle, line, ellipse,
polygon, and so on.
primitive attribute -A specifiable characteristic of a graphic primitive. See
graphics attributes.
print job -The result of sending a document or picture to be printed.
Print Manager -In the Presentation Manager, the part of the spooler that
manages the spooling process. It also allows users to view print queues and
to manipulate print jobs.
privilege level -A protection level imposed by the hardware architecture of
the IBM personal computer. There are four privilege levels (number 0
through 3). Only certain types of programs are allowed to execute at each
privilege level. See also IOPL code segment.
procedure call -In programming languages, a language construct for invoking
execution of a procedure.
process -An instance of an executing application and the resources it is
using.
program -A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and
execute.
program details -Information about a program that is specified in the Program
Manager window and is used when the program is started.
program group -In the Presentation Manager, several programs that can be
acted upon as a single entity.
program name -The full file specification of a program. Contrast with program
title.
program title -The name of a program as it is listed in the Program Manager
window. Contrast with program name.
prompt -A displayed symbol or message that requests input from the user or
gives operational information; for example, on the display screen of an IBM
personal computer, the DOS A> prompt. The user must respond to the prompt in
order to proceed.
protect mode -A method of program operation that limits or prevents access to
certain instructions or areas of storage. Contrast with real mode.
protocol -A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior
of functional units in achieving communication. (I)
pseudocode -An artificial language used to describe computer program
algorithms without using the syntax of any particular programming language. (A)
pull-down -(1) An action bar extension that displays a list of choices
available for a selected action bar choice. After users select an action bar
choice, the pull-down appears with the list of choices. Additional pop-up
windows may appear from pull-down choices to further extend the actions
available to users. (2) (D of C) In SAA Common User Access architecture,
pertaining to a choice in an action bar pull-down.
push -To add an item to a last-in-first-out stack of items. Contrast with
pop.
push button -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a rectangle
with text inside. Push buttons are used in windows for actions that occur
immediately when the push button is selected.
putback -To remove an object or set of objects from the lazy drag set. This
has the effect of undoing the pickup operation for those objects
putdown -To drop the objects in the lazy drag set on the target object.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Q ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
queue -(1) A linked list of elements waiting to be processed in FIFO order.
For example, a queue may be a list of print jobs waiting to be printed. (2)
(D of C) A line or list of items waiting to be processed; for example, work
to be performed or messages to be displayed.
queued device context -A logical description of a data destination (for
example, a printer or plotter) where the output is to go through the
spooler. See also device context.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - R ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
radio button -(1) A control window, shaped like a round button on the screen,
that can be in a checked or unchecked state. It is used to select a single
item from a list. Contrast with check box. (2) In SAA Advanced Common User
Access architecture, a circle with text beside it. Radio buttons are
combined to show a user a fixed set of choices from which only one can be
selected. The circle is partially filled when a choice is selected.
RAS -Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
raster -(1) In computer graphics, a predetermined pattern of lines that
provides uniform coverage of a display space. (T) (2) The coordinate grid
that divides the display area of a display device. (A)
read-only file -A file that can be read from but not written to.
real mode -A method of program operation that does not limit or prevent
access to any instructions or areas of storage. The operating system loads
the entire program into storage and gives the program access to all system
resources. Contrast with protect mode.
realize -To cause the system to ensure, wherever possible, that the physical
color table of a device is set to the closest possible match in the logical
color table.
recursive routine -A routine that can call itself, or be called by another
routine that was called by the recursive routine.
reentrant -The attribute of a program or routine that allows the same copy of
the program or routine to be used concurrently by two or more tasks.
reference phrase -(1) A word or phrase that is emphasized in a
device-dependent manner to inform the user that additional information for
the word or phrase is available. (2) (D of C) In hypertext, text that is
highlighted and preceded by a single-character input field used to signify
the existence of a hypertext link.
reference phrase help -In SAA Common User Access architecture, highlighted
words or phrases within help information that a user selects to get
additional information.
refresh -To update a window, with changed information, to its current status.
region -A clipping boundary in device space.
register -A part of internal storage having a specified storage capacity and
usually intended for a specific purpose. (T)
remote file system -A file-system driver that gains access to a remote system
without a block device driver.
resource -The means of providing extra information used in the definition of
a window. A resource can contain definitions of fonts, templates,
accelerators, and mnemonics; the definitions are held in a resource file.
resource file -A file containing information used in the definition of a
window. Definitions can be of fonts, templates, accelerators, and mnemonics.
restore -To return a window to its original size or position following a
sizing or moving action.
retained graphics -Graphic primitives that are remembered by the Presentation
Manager interface after they have been drawn. Contrast with nonretained
graphics.
return code -(1) A value returned to a program to indicate the results of an
operation requested by that program. (2) A code used to influence the
execution of succeeding instructions.(A)
reverse video -(1) A form of highlighting a character, field, or cursor by
reversing the color of the character, field, or cursor with its background;
for example, changing a red character on a black background to a black
character on a red background. (2) In SAA Basic Common User Access
architecture, a screen emphasis feature that interchanges the foreground and
background colors of an item.
REXX Language -Restructured Extended Executor. A procedural language that
provides batch language functions along with structured programming
constructs such as loops; conditional testing and subroutines.
RGB -(1) Color coding in which the brightness of the additive primary colors
of light, red, green, and blue, are specified as three distinct values of
white light. (2) Pertaining to a color display that accepts signals
representing red, green, and blue.
roman -Relating to a type style with upright characters.
root segment -In a hierarchical database, the highest segment in the tree
structure.
round-robin scheduling -A process that allows each thread to run for a
specified amount of time.
run time -(1) Any instant at which the execution of a particular computer
program takes place. (T) (2) The amount of time needed for the execution of
a particular computer program. (T) (3) The time during which an instruction
in an instruction register is decoded and performed. Synonym for execution
time.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - S ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
SAA -Systems Application Architecture.
SBCS -Single-byte character set.
scheduler -A computer program designed to perform functions such as
scheduling, initiation, and termination of jobs.
screen -In SAA Basic Common User Access architecture, the physical surface of
a display device upon which information is shown to a user.
screen device context -A logical description of a data destination that is a
particular window on the screen. See also device context.
SCREEN$ -Character-device name reserved for the display screen.
scroll bar -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a part of a
window, associated with a scrollable area, that a user interacts with to see
information that is not currently allows visible.
scrollable entry field -An entry field larger than the visible field.
scrollable selection field -A selection field that contains more choices than
are visible.
scrolling -Moving a display image vertically or horizontally in a manner such
that new data appears at one edge, as existing data disappears at the
opposite edge.
secondary window -A window that contains information that is dependent on
information in a primary window and is used to supplement the interaction in
the primary window.
sector -On disk or diskette storage, an addressable subdivision of a track
used to record one block of a program or data.
segment -See graphics segment.
segment attributes -Attributes that apply to the segment as an entity, as
opposed to the individual primitives within the segment. For example, the
visibility or detectability of a segment.
segment chain -All segments in a graphics presentation space that are defined
with the 'chained' attribute. Synonym for picture chain.
segment priority -The order in which segments are drawn.
segment store -An area in a normal graphics presentation space where retained
graphics segments are stored.
select -To mark or choose an item. Note that select means to mark or type in
a choice on the screen; enter means to send all selected choices to the
computer for processing.
select button -The button on a pointing device, such as a mouse, that is
pressed to select a menu choice. Also known as button 1.
selection cursor -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a visual
indication that a user has selected a choice. It is represented by outlining
the choice with a dotted box. See also text cursor.
selection field -(1) In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a set
of related choices. See also entry field. (2) In SAA Basic Common User
Access architecture, an area of a panel that cannot be scrolled and contains
a fixed number of choices.
semantics -The relationships between symbols and their meanings.
semaphore -An object used by applications for signalling purposes and for
controlling access to serially reusable resources.
separator -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a line or color
boundary that provides a visual distinction between two adjacent areas.
serial dialog box -See modal dialog box.
serialization -The consecutive ordering of items.
serialize -To ensure that one or more events occur in a specified sequence.
serially reusable resource (SRR) -A logical resource or object that can be
accessed by only one task at a time.
session -(1) A routing mechanism for user interaction via the console; a
complete environment that determines how an application runs and how users
interact with the application. OS/2 can manage more than one session at a
time, and more than one process can run in a session. Each session has its
own set of environment variables that determine where OS/2 looks for
dynamic-link libraries and other important files. (2) (D of C) In the OS/2
operating system, one instance of a started program or command prompt. Each
session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the
computer. The operating system is responsible for coordinating the resources
that each session uses, such as computer memory, allocation of processor
time, and windows on the screen.
Settings Notebook -A control window that is used to display the settings for
an object and to enable the user to change them.
shadow -An object that refers to another object. A shadow is not a copy of
another object, but is another representation of the object.
shadow box -The area on the screen that follows mouse movements and shows
what shape the window will take if the mouse button is released.
shared data -Data that is used by two or more programs.
shared memory -In the OS/2 operating system, a segment that can be used by
more than one program.
shear -In computer graphics, the forward or backward slant of a graphics
symbol or string of such symbols relative to a line perpendicular to the
baseline of the symbol.
shell -(1) A software interface between a user and the operating system of a
computer. Shell programs interpret commands and user interactions on devices
such as keyboards, pointing devices, and touch-sensitive screens, and
communicate them to the operating system. (2) Software that allows a kernel
program to run under different operating-system environments.
shutdown -The process of ending operation of a system or a subsystem,
following a defined procedure.
sibling processes -Child processes that have the same parent process.
sibling windows -Child windows that have the same parent window.
simple list -A list of like values; for example, a list of user names.
Contrast with mixed list.
single-byte character set (SBCS) -A character set in which each character is
represented by a one-byte code. Contrast with double-byte character set.
slider box -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture: a part of the
scroll bar that shows the position and size of the visible information in a
window relative to the total amount of information available. Also known as
thumb mark.
SOM -System Object Model.
source file -A file that contains source statements for items such as
high-level language programs and data description specifications.
source statement -A statement written in a programming language.
specific dynamic-link module -A dynamic-link module created for the exclusive
use of an application.
spin button -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, a type of entry
field that shows a scrollable ring of choices from which a user can select a
choice. After the last choice is displayed, the first choice is displayed
again. A user can also type a choice from the scrollable ring into the
entry field without interacting with the spin button.
spline -A sequence of one or more BВzier curves.
spooler -A program that intercepts the data going to printer devices and
writes it to disk. The data is printed or plotted when it is complete and
the required device is available. The spooler prevents output from
different sources from being intermixed.
stack -A list constructed and maintained so that the next data element to be
retrieved is the most recently stored. This method is characterized as
last-in-first-out (LIFO).
standard window -A collection of window elements that form a panel. The
standard window can include one or more of the following window elements:
sizing borders, system menu icon, title bar, maximize/minimize/restore
icons, action bar and pull-downs, scroll bars, and client area.
static control -The means by which the application presents descriptive
information (for example, headings and descriptors) to the user. The user
cannot change this information.
static storage -(1) A read/write storage unit in which data is retained in
the absence of control signals. (A) Static storage may use dynamic
addressing or sensing circuits. (2) Storage other than dynamic storage. (A)
style -See window style.
subclass -A class that inherits from another class. See also Inheritance.
subdirectory -In an IBM personal computer, a file referred to in a root
directory that contains the names of other files stored on the diskette or
fixed disk.
superclass -A class from which another class inherits. See also inheritance.
swapping -(1) A process that interchanges the contents of an area of real
storage with the contents of an area in auxiliary storage. (I) (A) (2) In
a system with virtual storage, a paging technique that writes the active
pages of a job to auxiliary storage and reads pages of another job from
auxiliary storage into real storage. (3) The process of temporarily removing
an active job from main storage, saving it on disk, and processing another
job in the area of main storage formerly occupied by the first job.
switch -(1) In SAA usage, to move the cursor from one point of interest to
another; for example, to move from one screen or window to another or from
a place within a displayed image to another place on the same displayed
image. (2) In a computer program, a conditional instruction and an indicator
to be interrogated by that instruction. (3) A device or programming
technique for making a selection, for example, a toggle, a conditional jump.
switch list -See Task List.
symbolic identifier -A text string that equates to an integer value in an
include file, which is used to identify a programming object.
symbols -In Information Presentation Facility, a document element used to
produce characters that cannot be entered from the keyboard.
synchronous -Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the
occurrence of specific events such as common timing signals. (T) See also
asynchronous.
System Menu -In the Presentation Manager, the pull-down in the top left
corner of a window that allows it to be moved and sized with the keyboard.
System Object Model (SOM) -A mechanism for language-neutral, object-oriented
programming in the OS/2 environment.
system queue -The master queue for all pointer device or keyboard events.
system-defined messages -Messages that control the operations of applications
and provides input an other information for applications to process.
Systems Application Architecture (SAA) -A set of IBM software interfaces,
conventions, and protocols that provide a framework for designing and
developing applications that are consistent across systems.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - T ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
table tags -In Information Presentation Facility, a document element that
formats text in an arrangement of rows and columns.
tag -(1) One or more characters attached to a set of data that contain
information about the set, including its identification. (I) (A) (2) In
Generalized Markup Language markup, a name for a type of document or
document element that is entered in the source document to identify it.
target object -An object to which the user is transferring information.
Task List -In the Presentation Manager, the list of programs that are active.
The list can be used to switch to a program and to stop programs.
terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) -Pertaining to an application that modifies
an operating system interrupt vector to point to its own location (known as
hooking an interrupt).
text -Characters or symbols.
text cursor -A symbol displayed in an entry field that indicates where typed
input will appear.
text window -Also known as the VIO window.
text-windowed application -The environment in which the operating system
performs advanced-video input and output operations.
thread -A unit of execution within a process. It uses the resources of the
process.
thumb mark -The portion of the scroll bar that describes the range and
properties of the data that is currently visible in a window. Also known as
a slider box.
thunk -Term used to describe the process of address conversion, stack and
structure realignment, etc., necessary when passing control between 16-bit
and 32-bit modules.
tilde -A mark used to denote the character that is to be used as a mnemonic
when selecting text items within a menu.
time slice -(1) An interval of time on the processing unit allocated for use
in performing a task. After the interval has expired, processing-unit time
is allocated to another task, so a task cannot monopolize processing-unit
time beyond a fixed limit. (2) In systems with time sharing, a segment of
time allocated to a terminal job.
time-critical process -A process that must be performed within a specified
time after an event has occurred.
timer -A facility provided under the Presentation Manager, whereby
Presentation Manager will dispatch a message of class WM_TIMER to a
particular window at specified intervals. This capability may be used by an
application to perform a specific processing task at predetermined
intervals, without the necessity for the application to explicitly keep
track of the passage of time.
timer tick -See clock tick.
title bar -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area at the
top of each window that contains the window title and system menu icon. When
appropriate, it also contains the minimize, maximize, and restore icons.
Contrast with panel title.
TLB -Translation lookaside buffer.
transaction -An exchange between a workstation and another device that
accomplishes a particular action or result.
transform -(1) The action of modifying a picture by scaling, shearing,
reflecting, rotating, or translating. (2) The object that performs or
defines such a modification; also referred to as a transformation.
Translation lookaside buffer (TLB) -A hardware-based address caching
mechanism for paging information.
Tree -In the Presentation Manager, the window in the File Manager that shows
the organization of drives and directories.
truncate -(1) To terminate a computational process in accordance with some
rule (A) (2) To remove the beginning or ending elements of a string. (3) To
drop data that cannot be printed or displayed in the line width specified or
available. (4) To shorten a field or statement to a specified length.
TSR -Terminate-and-stay-resident.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - U ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
unnamed pipe -A circular buffer, created in memory, used by related processes
to communicate with one another. Contrast with named pipe.
unordered list -In Information Presentation Facility, a vertical arrangement
of items in a list, with each item in the list preceded by a special
character or bullet.
update region -A system-provided area of dynamic storage containing one or
more (not necessarily contiguous) rectangular areas of a window that are
visually invalid or incorrect, and therefore are in need of repainting.
user interface -Hardware, software, or both that allows a user to interact
with and perform operations on a system, program, or device.
User Shell -A component of OS/2 that uses a graphics-based, windowed
interface to allow the user to manage applications and files installed and
running under OS/2.
utility program -(1) A computer program in general support of computer
processes; for example, a diagnostic program, a trace program, a sort
program. (T) (2) A program designed to perform an everyday task such as
copying data from one storage device to another. (A)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - V ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
value set control -A visual component that enables a user to select one
choice from a group of mutually exclusive choices.
vector font -A set of symbols, each of which is created as a series of lines
and curves. Synonymous with outline font. Contrast with image font.
VGA -Video graphics array.
view -A way of looking at an object's information.
viewing pipeline -The series of transformations applied to a graphic object
to map the object to the device on which it is to be presented.
viewing window -A clipping boundary that defines the visible part of model
space.
VIO -Video Input/Output.
virtual memory (VM) -Synonymous with virtual storage.
virtual storage -(1) The storage space that may be regarded as addressable
main storage by the user of a computer system in which virtual addresses are
mapped into real addresses. The size of virtual storage is limited by the
addressing scheme of the computer system and by the amount of auxiliary
storage available, not by the actual number of main storage
locations. (I) (A) (2) Addressable space that is apparent to the user as
the processor storage space, from which the instructions and the data are
mapped into the processor storage locations. (3) Synonymous with virtual
memory.
visible region -A window's presentation space, clipped to the boundary of the
window and the boundaries of any overlying window.
volume -(1) A file-system driver that uses a block device driver for input
and output operations to a local or remote device. (I) (2) A portion of
data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a
unit.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
wildcard character -Synonymous with global file-name character.
window -(1) A portion of a display surface in which display images pertaining
to a particular application can be presented. Different applications can be
displayed simultaneously in different windows. (A) (2) An area of the
screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A
window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen. Windows can
appear to overlap on the screen.
window class -The grouping of windows whose processing needs conform to the
services provided by one window procedure.
window coordinates -A set of coordinates by which a window position or size
is defined; measured in device units, or pels.
window handle -Unique identifier of a window, generated by Presentation
Manager when the window is created, and used by applications to direct
messages to the window.
window procedure -Code that is activated in response to a message. The
procedure controls the appearance and behavior of its associated windows.
window rectangle -The means by which the size and position of a window is
described in relation to the desktop window.
window resource -A read-only data segment stored in the .EXE file of an
application o the .DLL file of a dynamic link library.
window style -The set of properties that influence how events related to a
particular window will be processed.
window title -In SAA Advanced Common User Access architecture, the area in
the title bar that contains the name of the application and the OS/2
operating system file name, if applicable.
Workplace Shell -The OS/2 object-oriented, graphical user interface.
workstation -(1) A display screen together with attachments such as a
keyboard, a local copy device, or a tablet. (2) (D of C) One or more
programmable or nonprogrammable devices that allow a user to do work.
world coordinates -A device-independent Cartesian coordinate system used by
the application program for specifying graphical input and output. (I) (A)
world-coordinate space -Coordinate space in which graphics are defined before
transformations are applied.
WYSIWYG -What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get. A capability of a text editor to
continually display pages exactly as they will be printed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - X ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Y ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There are no glossary terms for this starting letter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Glossary - Z ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
z-order -The order in which sibling windows are presented. The topmost
sibling window obscures any portion of the siblings that it overlaps; the
same effect occurs down through the order of lower sibling windows.
zooming -The progressive scaling of an entire display image in order to give
the visual impression of movement of all or part of a display group toward
or away from an observer. (I) (A)
8.3 file-name format -A file-naming convention in which file names are
limited to eight characters before and three characters after a single dot.
Usually pronounced "eight-dot-three." See also non-8.3 file-name format.